Canon | EOS 7D | User manual | Canon EOS 7D User manual

Canon EOS 7D User manual
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻜﺮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ‪ EOS 7D‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪ CMOS‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ١٨٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ "‪ "DIGIC 4‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ‪ ٪١٠٠‬ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ١٩‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫)ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٨‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪) Full HD‬ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﻲ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﺎء‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻷﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻳﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ )ﺹ‪ ٢٦١‬ﻭ‪ (٢٦٢‬ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪ ١٢‬ﻭ‪.(١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺎﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﻈﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻷﻱ ﻏﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﻈﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ "ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ .CF‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) CF‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E6‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*LC-E6/LC-E6E‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﻟﻠﺠﺴﻢ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪IFC-200U‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫‪EW-EOS7D‬‬
‫‪EOS DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪Solution Disk‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ(‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ )‪ (EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk‬ﻭﺃﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LC-E6‬ﺃﻭ ‪) .LC-E6E‬ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ‪ LC-E6E‬ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<6‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<5‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<9‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<0‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪ٍ ٦‬‬
‫‪ : 8 ،7 ،9 ،0‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪ : 3‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : M‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ d‬ﺃﻭ ‪ s‬ﺃﻭ ‪ f‬ﺃﻭ ‪ a‬ﺃﻭ ‪.B‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪.(C/1‬‬
‫)ﺹ **(‪ :‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻧﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<1‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﺗﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<J‬‬
‫ﻳُُﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪.IS USM 5.6-85mm f/3.5-EF-S15‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ )‪ (DSLR‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻼﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪) Live View shooting‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪١٤٩‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١٦١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫‪١٨٣‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١٨٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٢٠٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪٢٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻖ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ‪٣ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ‪٤ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‪٥ ..................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ‪١٠ .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٢ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪١٤ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ‪١٦ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪٢٤ .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ‪٢٦ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٢٧ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ‪٢٩ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ‪٣١ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٣٣ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪٣٤ ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪٣٨ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪٤٠ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪٤٢ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪٤٢ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪٤٢ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪٤٣ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٤٤ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪٤٥ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪٤٧ ................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ‪٥٠ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪٥٢ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪٥٣ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪56 ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٥٨ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٦٢ ............................................................................................ISO‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٦٤ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٦٦ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٦٨ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪٧٠ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ‪٧١ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٧٢ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪٧٣ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪٧٥ ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٧٦ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ‪٧٨ ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪٨٠ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪٨٢ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪٨٤ ................................................................... (AF‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪٨٧ ...................................................................(AF‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪٨٩ ................................................................ (AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪٩٢ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪٩٢ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ i‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪٩٣ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ j‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪٩٤ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪٩٦ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪٩٨ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪١٠٠ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪١٠١ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :a‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ‪١٠٢ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :q‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪١٠٣ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪١٠٤ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ h‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪١٠٥ .......................................................................(AEB‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪١٠٦ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :F‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪١٠٧ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪١٠٩ ............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪١١٠ ........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪١١١ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١١٥ .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪١١٩ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪١٢٩ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪١٣٢ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٣٥ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪١٣٦ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪١٣٨ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪١٤٥ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪١٤٩‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪١٥٠ ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٥٥ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪١٥٦ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١٦١‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٦٢ ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٦٣ ............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ HI‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٦٥ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ u/y‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ ‪١٦٧ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪١٦٨ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪١٦٩ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪١٧٣ ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻭﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪١٧٤ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪١٧٤ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪١٧٦ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ K‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٧٨ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٧٩ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٨١ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٨١ .................................................................................... LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪١٨٢ ................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫‪١٨٣‬‬
‫‪ f‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪١٨٤ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ‪١٨٥ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪١٨٧ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١٨٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪١٩٠ ....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪١٩٢ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٩٧ ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪١٩٩ ...................................................................(DPOF‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ‪٢٠٢ ....................................‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٢٠٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪٢٠٤ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٢٠٥ ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪٢٠٦ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪٢٠٦ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٢٠٨ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٣‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٢٠٩ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪٢١٥ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ‪٢٢٢ .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٢٢٣ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪٢٢٥ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪٢٢٧‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪٢٢٨ ............................................................................................... B‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪٢٣٠ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪٢٣٤ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٢٣٥ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪٢٣٦ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪٢٣٨ ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ ‪٢٤٣ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪٢٤٩ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪٢٥٠ ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪٢٥٢ .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪٢٦١ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪٢٧٠ .............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫• ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٣٠‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٣٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬ﻓﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣١‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٢‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٨١‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٣٨‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٧٨‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥٨‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٦١‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٦٢‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٧٥‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٧٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٠٨‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٠٨‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٠٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٨٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫• ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٨٩‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢١٢‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٩٣‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‪/‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪(AF‬‬
‫•ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫• ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٨٢‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٤٨‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥٣‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٩٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٩٨‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٠٧‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٠٩‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٩٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٠٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ Í (AEB‬ﺹ ‪١٠٥‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٠٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫• ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١١١‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١١٣‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١١٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٢٩‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١١٥‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٦٢‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٦٣‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٧١‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٦٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٦٧‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٧٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٧٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٧٨‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٧٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪(C.Fn‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٠٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢١٥‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٢٢‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٢٣‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٧٣‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٣١‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٣٨‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٤٥‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٣٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٣٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٣٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٤٩‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٥٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٥٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ /‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٨٣‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٨٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٤٧‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٢١‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ .Canon‬ﺟﻔﻒ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎء ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺼﺮﻫﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻟﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻳُﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻣﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺧﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻄﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺂﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺂﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﺲ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻭﺩﻋﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ ﻛﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺁﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻓﺤﺼﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﺘﺨﻄﻰ ‪ ٪٩٩٫٩٩‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٪٠٫٠١‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻄﻼ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﺦ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺒﻀﻌﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ً LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻟﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺇﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺵ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳُﻌﺪ ﻋﻴﺒًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪EF-S‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪EF‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ،EF-S‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<AF‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) .<1‬ﺹ ‪(٢٧‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<1‬‬
‫)ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٥٠‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٥٦‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪) <x‬ﺹ ‪.(١٦٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺹ ‪.(١٦٢‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺹ ‪.(١٧٩‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻮﺳﻴﻦ )ﺹ **(‪.‬‬
‫>‪ <n‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٧٠/١٠٣‬‬
‫>‪ <o‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٩٣/٨٤‬‬
‫>‪ <m‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪/ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١١٣/٦٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪(١٨‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪) EF‬ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٩١/١١١‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪) EF-S‬ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫>‪ <U‬ﺯﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫>‪<B‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١١٤ ،٨٨‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٩‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ )ﺹ ‪(٢٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ )ﺹ ‪(٢٣‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ‬
‫‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٩٤/١١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٥٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺹ ‪(١١٠‬‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١١١‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ‬
‫)ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﺹ ‪(١٠١‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٢٣٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٨٧ ،١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺩﺑﻮﺱ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ )ﺹ ‪(١٣‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٥١‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٠‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٩٠ ،١٧٦‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺹ ‪) (١٠٨‬ﻧﻮﻉ ‪(N3‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٧‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ )ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫>‪ <V‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫>‪ <p‬ﺯﺭ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٥١ ،١٣٣ ،٨٥ ،٣٥‬‬
‫>‪ <A/I‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪/(AE‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪/١٦٥/١٠٦‬‬
‫‪(١٩٧ ،١٦٧‬‬
‫>‪ <A/l‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ /‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ ‪/(١٤٩/١٣١‬‬
‫>‪ <٠‬ﺯﺭ ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٥٠ ،١٣٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٧١‬‬
‫>‪ <P/l‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪RAW+JPEG‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٩٥/٦١‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٢٧‬‬
‫>‪ <S/u‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪/(AF‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٩٧ ،١٦٧/٨٧‬‬
‫>‪ <9‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٦‬‬
‫>‪ <Q‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ )ﺹ ‪(٢٣‬‬
‫>‪ <M‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٤٠‬‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫>‪ <B‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪١٣٤ ،٤٨‬‬
‫‪(١٥٢،١٦٢،٢٢٨‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٩‬‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫>‪ <x‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٦٢‬‬
‫>‪ <L‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٧٩‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )ﺹ ‪(٣٠‬‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪(١٨١ ،٤٠‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺹ ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﺹ ‪(١٨١‬‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )ﺹ ‪(٤٠‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٢٩‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٠‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(FuLL CF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Err CF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(no CF‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ )‪(Err‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(CLn‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٧٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪ <h‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪) (AEB‬ﺹ ‪(١٠٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٨٤‬‬
‫‪X‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٩٣‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ o‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ )‪(buSY‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ )‪(buSY‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪(٦٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪68‬‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ RAW a1‬ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫‪ RAW 61‬ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٠‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ W‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ E‬ﻇﻼﻝ‬
‫‪ R‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫‪ Y‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ U‬ﺿﻮء ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪ I‬ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫‪ P‬ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪) (AEB‬ﺹ ‪(١٠٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١١٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ )ﺹ ‪(٢٠٩‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٣‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ r‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫‪ e‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪bn‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٢٨‬‬
‫‪z xcm‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١١٣‬‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺹ ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫>‪ <g‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪/(AF‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٨٧‬‬
‫>‪ <S‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫>‪ <O‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٨٧‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٤٧‬‬
‫>‪ <g‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫>‪ <u‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫>‪ <o‬ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫> < ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫>‪ <d‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫>‪ <e‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫)ﻓﻼﺵ ‪(FP‬‬
‫>‪ <y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(FEL‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ )‪(buSY‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(FuLL CF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Err CF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(no CF‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ w‬ﺃﻭ ‪ x‬ﺃﻭ ‪) y‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٢٣‬‬
‫‪ : F‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٧‬‬
‫‪ : a‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٢‬‬
‫‪ : f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٠‬‬
‫‪ : s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺹ ‪(٩٨‬‬
‫‪ : d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٩٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ )ﺹ ‪(٥٠‬‬
‫‪ :C‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٥٣‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣُﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٥٨‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣُﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٥٨‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٥ ،٩٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ )ﺹ ‪(١٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣُﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٥ ،٩٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٥٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٥٨‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ )ﺹ ‪(١٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E6‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) LP-E6‬ﺹ ‪(٢٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﻄﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ‪ -‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻻ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴًﺎ ﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E6E‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) LP-E6‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٤‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﺮﺭﻩ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﺑﺰﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺨﺎء ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﺨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺑﺰﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(١٠٨‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪LC-E6‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺣﻦ ‪LC-E6‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺮﺩ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪LC-E6E‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺣﻦ ‪LC-E6E‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٪٥٠ - ٠‬‬
‫‪٪٧٥ - ٥٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫‪ ٪٧٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٫٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺪﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ٤١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ ﻭﺳﺘﻔﻘﺪ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺟﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ‬
‫< ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ >‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ ﻭﻗﺼﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺪ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺗﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٣٠‬ﻭﺑﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ٪٩٤ (٢٣٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﻦ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻌﺘﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻹﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫>‪ : <1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<2‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻌﺮﺽ >‪ .<f‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻞ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ )ﺹ ‪ (٣٥‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2>/<1‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ .<f‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[5Auto power off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <OFF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ (...‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Recording ...‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<1‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ )‪ (b‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫)‪(%‬‬
‫‪٧٠ - ١٠٠‬‬
‫‪٥٠ - ٦٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠ - ٤٩‬‬
‫‪١٠ - ١٩‬‬
‫‪١-٩‬‬
‫‪٠‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ °٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ °٧٣ /‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ °٠‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ °٣٢ /‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٩٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪٪٥٠‬‬
‫‪ ٨٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٧٥٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ CIPA‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ BG-E7‬ﻳﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ‪ .LP-E6‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ AA/LR6‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪/‬‬
‫‪ °٧٣‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪.٪٥٠‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [7 Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٣٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ AA/LR6‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،BG-E7‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺫﻱ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫[‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ُﺳﻤﻚ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ )‪ ،CF (CompactFlash‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ )‪ Ultra DMA (UDMA‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺮﺯ ﺯﺭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺣﺮﻛﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<1‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [1Release shutter without card‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮﻙ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺴﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٣٨‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻣﻴﻀﻪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪) ٠٠٠١‬ﺹ ‪.(٨٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﺄﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪ .(٤٣‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻣﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ ،CF‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻄﺤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪EF-S‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF-S‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ EF-S‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ ،EF-S‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪EF‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻜﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻜﻮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺎﻟﻜﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪:EF-S18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ١٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <LOCK‬ﻗﻔﻞ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻮ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ ١,٦‬ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫)‪ ١٤٫٩ × ٢٢٫٣‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٠٫٥٩ × ٠٫٨٨ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫)‪ ٢٤ × ٣٦‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٠٫٩٤ × ١٫٤٢ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ُﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ،IS‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ IS‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﺎﺭﺏ ﻣﺘﺄﺭﺟﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ،IS USM 5.6-135mm f/3.5-EF28‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ EF- S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬ﻭ‪ EF-S18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺻﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ )ﺹ ‪.(١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪) Eg‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻟﻒ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ ﺇﺻﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺫﺭﺍﻋﻴﻚ ﻭﻣﺮﻓﻘﻴﻚ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻗﺪﻣﻴﻚ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٣١‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪.(0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗُﻌﺮﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺛﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،F/a/f/s/d‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ )‪ .(9‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ >‪ <9‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻭﺯﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ]‪[3Erase images‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻭ]‪) [5Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ((‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،<5‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<J‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ )‪ .(9‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ )‪ (١‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<R‬‬
‫‪ U‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪/(9‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<U‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪) 1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )‪.(7‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪ (٥٨‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺹ ‪.(١١٠ ،٩٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪d/s/f/a/F‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <C‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٥٣‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ*‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٠٩‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١١٣‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٧٥‬‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢١٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٩٣‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺹ ‪(٩٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( )ﺹ ‪(١٠٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ * )ﺹ ‪(٢٠‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺹ ‪(٨٧‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪(٥٨‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺹ ‪(٨٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٧٠‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ .<0‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪<0 > Ð‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﺄﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﻴﻦ >‪.<5> <6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ >‪<6‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ >‪<5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<0‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ )‪(C/1‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪F/a/f/s/d‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪8‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻖ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪) .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ]‪) [3Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻭ]‪) [5Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‪(.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٣٨‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Language K‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Language K‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ( )ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Date/Time‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <0‬ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ ﻷﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Auto power off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Clear all camera settings‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Clear all‬‬
‫‪) [camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Clear all camera settings‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪AF area selection‬‬
‫‪) mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Metering mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫‪Auto selection 19-point‬‬
‫‪) AF‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺸﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫‪) q‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) ISO speed‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬
‫‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) Drive mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) u‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪Exposure‬‬
‫‪compensation/AEB‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫‪) Canceled‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫‪) ٠‬ﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪) Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪One-touch RAW+JPEG‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ‪73‬‬
‫‪) Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫‪Auto Lighting Optimizer‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫)ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫‪) Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫‪Peripheral illumination‬‬
‫‪correction‬‬
‫)ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪Color space‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫‪White balance‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪WB correction‬‬
‫)ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪) WB-BKT‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪) File numbering‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪) Auto cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ(‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪/‬‬
‫‪Correction data‬‬
‫‪) retained‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ(‬
‫‪sRGB‬‬
‫‪) Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) Canceled‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‬
‫‪) Canceled‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‬
‫‪) Continuous‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ(‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪) Erased‬ﻣﺴﺢ(‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪VF grid display‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫‪Auto power off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) Beep‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪Release shutter‬‬
‫‪) without card‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪) Review time‬ﻣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ(‬
‫‪) Highlight alert‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ(‬
‫‪AF point display‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Histogram‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(‬
‫‪Image jump w/ 6‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(6‬‬
‫‪) Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪LCD brightness‬‬
‫)ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫‪) Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫‪) Language‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬
‫‪) Video system‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪INFO. button display‬‬
‫‪) options‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ‪(INFO.‬‬
‫‪Camera user setting‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪Copyright‬‬
‫‪) information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‬
‫‪My Menu settings‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) 1 min.‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪) 2 sec.‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ(‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫‪Live View shooting‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Grid display‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬
‫‪Exposure simulation‬‬
‫)ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪) Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪) Silent shooting‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ(‬
‫‪) Metering timer‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ ١٦) 16 sec.‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(١‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪) Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫‪ ١٠) 10 images‬ﺻﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪) Grid display‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Movie- recording size‬‬
‫)ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬
‫‪1920x1080 6‬‬
‫‪) On zD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪(D z‬‬
‫‪) Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪:‬‬
‫‪) Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪Sound recording‬‬
‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪) Silent shooting‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪) Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ(‬
‫‪) Metering timer‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ ١٦) 16 sec.‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻤًﺎ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [VF grid display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪VF grid‬‬
‫‪) [display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ ‪.(١٥٦ ،١٣٦‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<B‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪[7INFO. button display options‬‬
‫)ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (INFO.‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٢٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻔﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪.°١‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻝ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪.°١±‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(١٥٢ ،١٣٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٢١‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ )‪(C/1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ )‪ ،(C/1‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪ .(٢٣٦‬ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ )‪ ،(C/1‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٧٥‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﺪﻭﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻨﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﺜﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ )ﺹ ‪ .(٩٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪(.<o‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ (.<o‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻧﺒﺜﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٣٫١/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٦٫٤/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻇﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ٣٫٣/‬ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﻟﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ( ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ )ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺿﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻬﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ >‪ <1‬ﺑﻜﻞ ﺷﻲء‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ >‪ <C‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻤًﺎ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫>‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ CA‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<C‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪(7) .‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪.٥٥ - ٥٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٤٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<2‬ﻓﺴﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <a‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <D‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺃﻭ >‪ ) <b‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻬﺘﺎ ًﻧﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻧﺒﺜﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪ :٦٤‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫>‪) <P‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>‪) <Q‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ(‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫>‪) <R‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ(‪ :‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫>‪) <V‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٥‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫>‪) <i‬ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ(‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ) ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ‬
‫>‪) <Q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .٩٤‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑُﻌﺪ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(١١٠‬‬
‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<o‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Drive mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٦‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪.٦٠ - ٥٨‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ( ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﺑﻘﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Hold‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Review time‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Review time‬‬
‫)ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Hold‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ )‪ ،(C/1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ>‪.<F/a/f/s/d‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .86/76/84/74/83/73 :JPEG‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 1 :RAW‬ﻭ‪ 41‬ﻭ‪.61‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Quality‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،RAW‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "***‪M‬‬
‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ( **** ‪ "**** x‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ]***[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫)ﺣﺘﻰ ‪.(٩٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 73‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪73+1‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]–[ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪.73‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪74+61‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪74‬‬
‫‪84‬‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫‪+ RAW‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫)ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٧٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪(17.9M‬‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(8M‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪A3‬‬
‫‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(4.5M‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪A4‬‬
‫‪86‬‬
‫‪ ١٧٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫)‪(17.9M‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٫١ 41‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(10M‬‬
‫‪ ٤٫٥ 61‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(4.5M‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫‪٥٩٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫‪(١٢٦) ٩٤‬‬
‫‪٣٫٣‬‬
‫‪١١٦٩‬‬
‫‪(١١٦٩) ٤٦٩‬‬
‫‪٣٫٥‬‬
‫‪١١٢٢‬‬
‫‪(١١٢٢) ٤٥٤‬‬
‫‪١٫٨‬‬
‫‪٢١٧٨‬‬
‫‪(٢١٧٨) ٢١٧٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪٦٫٦‬‬
‫‪٢٫٢‬‬
‫‪١٧٣٩‬‬
‫‪(١٧٣٩) ١٧٣٩‬‬
‫‪١٫١‬‬
‫‪٣٢٩٧‬‬
‫‪(٣٢٩٧) ٣٢٩٧‬‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪٢٥٫١‬‬
‫‪١٥٥‬‬
‫‪(١٥) ١٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪A3‬‬
‫‪١٧٫١‬‬
‫‪٢٢٩‬‬
‫‪(٢٤) ٢٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪A4‬‬
‫‪١١٫٤‬‬
‫‪٣٤٥‬‬
‫‪(٣٨) ٣٨‬‬
‫‪٦٫٦+٢٥٫١‬‬
‫‪١٢٢‬‬
‫‪(٦) ٦‬‬
‫‪١٦٤‬‬
‫‪(٦) ٦‬‬
‫‪٢١٧‬‬
‫‪(٦) ٦‬‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪ ١٧٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ ١٧٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٫١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫‪ ١٧٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪A3‬‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪٦٫٦+١٧٫١‬‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫‪ ١٧٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪A4‬‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪٦٫٦+١١٫٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ ISO 100‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ )‪ Ultra DMA (UDMA‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ ،JPEG‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻜﻼ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻭﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻫﻮ ‪ JPG.‬ﻭﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻫﻮ ‪.(CR2.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ RAW)41 ،(RAW) 1 :‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ( ‪RAW)61‬‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‪) 7 ،JPEG ،‬ﺟﻴﺪﺓ(‪) 8 ،‬ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‪) 3 ،‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ(‪) 4 ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ( ﻭ‪) 6‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 41‬ﺃﻭ ‪61‬‬
‫)ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ‪.(RAW‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪ TIFF‬ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ .RAW‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻫﻮ ‪ ٩٩‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪."99‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [8C.Fn II - 2: High ISO speed noise reduction‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :2 - 2‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ :٢) [Strong :2‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٠٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ "‪ "99‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ ٩٩‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻭﺍﻣﺘﻸﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪) "buSY‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٥٩‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻰ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <P‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ً RAW‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ )‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴًﺎ( ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻰ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 73) JPEG‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ )ﺹ ‪ (٥٨‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [One-touch RAW+JPEG‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[y‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪One- touch‬‬
‫‪) [RAW+JPEG‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW+JPEG‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<P‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫‪ .LCD‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<P‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺗﻲ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AEB‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <M‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <A‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <x‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪NISO‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء( ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ )‪ ،(C/1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO 100-6400‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٣/١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪ ،"A‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٦٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪100 - 400‬‬
‫‪400 - 1600‬‬
‫‪1600 - 6400, H‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﻤﺴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﺒﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎء‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺯﺍﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪.(١١٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ 8) [8C.Fn II -3: Highlight tone priority‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪ :٣ - ٢‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ :١) [1: Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ ‪) ISO 200 - 6400‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٠٩‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺤﺒﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ )ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ 8) [8C.Fn I -3: ISO expansion‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٣ - ١‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ :١) [1: On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪) "H‬ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪) (ISO 12800‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٠٦‬‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪NISO‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) "A" ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ "‪ ،"A‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ISO 100 - 3200 a/f/s/d/C/1‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ISO 400‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪*ISO 400‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ISO 100‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﻮ >‪ <d‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ )‪ (C/1‬ﻭﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪.3200 - 400‬‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [2 Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪) Standard P‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( )‪ :C‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Portrait Q‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( )‪ :C‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﻌﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻧﺴﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ]‪) [Color tone‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( )ﺹ ‪،(٦٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Landscape R‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( )‪ :C‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﻭﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻬﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫‪) Neutral S‬ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ(‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Faithful U‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ(‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٢٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻭﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Monochrome V‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( )‪ :C‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <0‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪) User Def. 1-3 W‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪(٣-١‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪) [Portrait‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Landscape‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﺹ ‪ .(٦٨‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ -‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ( ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ‬
‫‪j‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ>‪ <M‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬
‫]‪ : [0‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫]‪ : [+7‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬
‫‪ h‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫]‪ : [-4‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫]‪ : [+4‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ‬
‫]‪ : [-4‬ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫]‪ : [+4‬ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ j‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫]‪ : [-4‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫]‪ : [+4‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ g‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Default set.‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Filter effect‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ( ﻭ]‪[Toning effect‬‬
‫)ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Filter Effect k‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬
‫‪) None :N‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ(‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Yellow :Ye‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪) Orange :Or‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ( ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ً‬
‫ﺇﺑﻬﺎﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫‪) Red :R‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻗﻄﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪) Green :G‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺠﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪) Toning Effect l‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪) [N:None] :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ(‬
‫]‪) [S:Sepia‬ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ( ]‪) [B:Blue‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫]‪) [P:Purple‬ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ]‪) [G:Green‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪) [Portrait‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Landscape‬‬
‫)ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪) [User Def. 1‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [User Def. 2‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ (٢‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [User Def. 3‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪.(٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ *(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ" ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪.٦٧-٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ *(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ *(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]* ‪[User Def.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺨﺼﺺ *(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ (WB‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﺿﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫>‪) <Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ >‪ ،<Q‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ )‪ ،(C/1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ <Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪Q‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) <n‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪ :K‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫‪٧٠٠٠ - ٣٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫‪٥٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫ﻇﻞ‬
‫‪٧٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺷﻔﻖ‪ ،‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‬
‫‪٦٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫‪٣٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪٤٠٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪٦٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ )ﺹ ‪(٧١‬‬
‫‪١٠٠٠٠ - ٢٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺹ ‪(٧٢‬‬
‫‪١٠٠٠٠ - ٢٥٠٠‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﺄﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [2White balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫‪ :WB‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮﻁ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺟﺴﻤًﺎ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺻﻠﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Custom WB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Custom WB‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<n‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫>‪.<O‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫‪ :WB‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( )ﺹ ‪،(٦٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪) ٪١٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ( ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ >‪ .<O‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻔﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [White balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[White balance‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[P‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢٥٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٠٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ <P‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﺎﺩﻭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [WB SHIFT/BKT‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪WB SHIFT/‬‬
‫‪) [BKT‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪1G ،A2 :‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ " " ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ G‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ "‪"SHIFT‬‬
‫)ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [WB SHIFT/BKT‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <u‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ٥‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ Mired‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ :Mired) .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ .(WB-BKT‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣±‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪..‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣±‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ؛‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،<5‬ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "‬
‫" ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ " " )‪ ٣‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‬
‫"‪ "BKT‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [WB SHIFT/BKT‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .١ :‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭ‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ )‪(B‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ )‪ (A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .١‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭ‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫)‪ (M‬ﻭ‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ )‪.(G‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﻳﻘﻞ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻠﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻣﻌًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫"‪ "BKT‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪N‬‬
‫‪ُ 3‬ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ ،RAW‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Auto Lighting Optimizer‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Auto‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪) [Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ )‪ ،(C/1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺿﻮء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo‬‬
‫‪) Professional‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Peripheral illumin. correct.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Peripheral‬‬
‫‪) [illumin. correct.‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪Correction data‬‬
‫‪) [available‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ( ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪Correction data not‬‬
‫‪) [available‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫"ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ" ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻠﺢ ﻟﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٥‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ( ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.EOS Utility‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Correction data available‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻳﻘﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺤﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻷﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Select folder‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Select folder‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Create folder‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Create folder‬‬
‫)ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<5‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ "‪ "100EOS7D‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺎ ﺑﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ .(٩٩٩٩ - ٠٠٠١‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٨١‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.٩٩٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻣﺠﻠ ًﺪﺍ ﺟﺪﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "‪ ."DCIM‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DCIM‬ﻭﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ "‪ "100ABC_D‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩٩ - ١٠٠‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Z‬ﻭﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ "_"‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫"‪ "100ABC_D‬ﻭ"‪ "100W_XYZ‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺑﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.IMG_0001.JPG :‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [File numbering‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[File numbering‬‬
‫)ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪) Continuous‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫‪ .٩٩٩٩‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ً‬
‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪٢-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪١-‬‬
‫‪XXX-0052‬‬
‫‪XXX-0051‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪١-‬‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪XXX-0052‬‬
‫‪XXX-0051‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) Auto Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ .٠٠٠١‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،٠٠٠١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ً‬
‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪٢-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪١-‬‬
‫‪100-0001‬‬
‫‪XXX-0051‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪١-‬‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪XXX-0001‬‬
‫‪XXX-0051‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) Manual Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺒﺪء ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ .٠٠٠١‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺲ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻻﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ ،RAW‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑـ "_‪ ."IMG‬ﻭﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑـ‬
‫"_‪ ."MVI‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "‪ ".JPG‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ"‪ ".CR2‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ"‪ ".MOV‬ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .Adobe RGB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.sRGB‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ )‪ ،(C/1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ sRGB‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Color space‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Color space‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Adobe RGB‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Adobe RGB‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،Adobe RGB ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ .(Exif 2.21) ٢٫٠‬ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ sRGB‬ﺑﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ .(Exif 2.21) ٢٫٠‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ،Adobe RGB‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑـ "_‪"_MG‬‬
‫)ﺃﻭﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻴﺔ "_"(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .ICC‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ICC‬ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ M‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<F/a/f/s/d‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ )‪ ،(C/1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <MF‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N(AF‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪ ،(C/1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪) "AI Focus AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ (AI Focus‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<o‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫‪ :X‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ :9‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Focus‬‬
‫‪ :Z‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫‪ :AF‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N(AF‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻨﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﻮء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪<o‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ،F/a/f/s/d‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<p‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ" )ﺹ ‪.(٩٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [Beep 1‬ﺻﻔﻴﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬
‫‪ :AF‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N(AF‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ،F/a/f/s/d‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<p‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Focus‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Focus‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺪﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.AI Servo‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Focus‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،Servo‬ﺳﺘُﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻴﺮ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N(AF‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٨٩‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ( )ﺹ ‪(٩٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٩٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ )‪.(C/1‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [8C.Fn III - 6: Select AF area selec. mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪ :٦ - ٣‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( )ﺹ ‪ ،(٢١٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( )ﺹ ‪(٨٩‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( )ﺹ ‪(٨٩‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <S‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ >‪ <w‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N(AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<S‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ١٩‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<S‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ > ‪ .<9‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻭ>‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [8C.Fn III -7: Manual AF pt. selec. pattern‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪:٧ - ٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻣﺎ ]‪[Stops at AF area edges:0‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ :١) [Continuous :1‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ( )ﺹ ‪.(٢١٢‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٦ - ٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫>‪ <O‬ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﺺ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ (AF) <S‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٦ - ٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ >‪ <S‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ >‪ <w‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ >‪ <S‬ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻊ >‪ <S‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ >‪.<S‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺻﻌﺐ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ <S> (AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٥‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ )‪.(C/1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪<S> (AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻫﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ <S> (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪.(C/1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ١٩‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ .AI Servo‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً‬
‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [8C.Fn II-12: Orientation linked AF point‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪ :١٢ - ٣‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪1: Select different AF‬‬
‫‪) [points‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(٢١٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [8C.Fn III -10: Focus display in AI SERVO/MF‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :١٠ - ٣‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻰ ‪ (AI SERVO/MF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ >‪ <S‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪.AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ - (AF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪ً -‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ١٣٫١‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ،F/a/f/s/d‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻟﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪f/5.6‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪*f/2.8‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻛﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪.f/5.6‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫* ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮ ‪ EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM‬ﻭ‪.EF50mm f/2.5‬‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﺸﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫>‪ (<o‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺋﻂ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻋﺎﻛﺲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﻧﺎﻃﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٢‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻨﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫‪ i‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<o‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫‪ : u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :o‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٨‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ : i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ : Q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫‪ :k‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١١٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﻄﺊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﻄﺊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫‪ j‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ >‪) <Q‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ( ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<o‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ : Q‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫‪ :k‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ )ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ >‪ <k‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ )ﺹ ‪.(١٦٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(١٠٨‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺷﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪ (٥٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺋﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<o‬‬
‫‪٩٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/f/s/d‬‬
‫‪ F/a‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<F/a/f/s/d‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪.(0‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪/f/s/d‬‬
‫‪ F/a‬ﻓﻲ "ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ" )ﺹ ‪.(٢٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<J‬‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪.(AE‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <d‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<d‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﻀﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ""‪ "30‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‪ "8000‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪) ND‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ >‪ <d‬ﻭ>‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻳﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<d‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻴﻔﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء )ﺹ ‪.(٢٣٦‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻴﻔﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫"ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
‫‪ :s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻫﺖ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﻄﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <s‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﺮ‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<s‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻣﻦ "‪ "8000‬ﺇﻟﻰ "‪ "4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ "125‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٢٥/١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ "0"5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠٫٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ""‪ "15‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ /f‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ /f‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻗﻞ )ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ( ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <f‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<f‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ""‪ "30‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ )‪ /f‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻗﻞ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‪ "8000‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ )‪ /f‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ‪ /f‬ﺭﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ "‪ "00‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪/f‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ "ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ"‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠١‬‬
‫‪ :a‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ >‪ <a‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ >‪.<a‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <J‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫>‪ <s‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪ (٧٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ 2) [2 Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٢‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ )‪،(C/1‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<n‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٪٩٫٤‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ r‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺠﺰء ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ٪٢٫٣‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ e‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ( ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ )ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ )ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ ٣/١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺨﻄﻰ ‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪ 2) [2 Exp. comp./AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <d‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪ <s‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<f‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<J‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ )‪ ،(0‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ >‪ <E‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪ (٧٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ 2) [2 Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<R‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ >‪ <I‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪.<J‬‬
‫‪١٠٤‬‬
‫‪ h‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪N(AEB‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٣/١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ "‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ("‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ AEB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Expo. comp./AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Expo. comp./‬‬
‫‪) [AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ .<5‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <h‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ ﻟﻼﻧﻄﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<u‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫>‪ <o‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <i‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<k‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٥‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪N(AE‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ"‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(0) .<A‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <A‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٣‬‬
‫‪*q‬‬
‫‪wre‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺹ ‪(٨٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪١٠٦‬‬
‫‪ :F‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻐﻠﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<F‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﺷﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ 8) [8C.Fn II -1: Long exp. noise reduction‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪:١ - ٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ :١) [1: Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ :٢) [2: On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٠٨‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ RS-80N3‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) TC-80N3‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (١١٠‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
‫‪ :F‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٣‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ RS-80N3‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪TC-80N3‬‬
‫)ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ‪ EOS‬ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ N3‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻔﻀﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ‪N‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ( ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ 8) [8C.Fn III -13: Mirror lockup‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :١٣ - ٣‬ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ :١) [1: Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( )ﺹ ‪ ،(٢١٥‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﺄﺭﺟﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﺸﻤﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﻲء ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﺟﻠﻴﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻕ ﻭﺗﻠﻒ ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪ +‬ﺯﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﺍ ﻓﻌﻠﻴًﺎ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻴﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﻤﻊ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ :١) [1: Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<k‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ RS-80N3‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) TC-80N3‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ .(١١٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ،RC-1‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٩‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ RC-1‬ﺃﻭ ‪) RC-5‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ ‪ ١٦٫٤/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪RC-1‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪RC-5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻼ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪RC-1‬‬
‫‪RC-5‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫>‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪.<f‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<o‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫>‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<k‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ،F/a/f/s/d‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <D‬ﻟﻴﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﺜﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪ .(٥٠‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<C‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ F/a/f/s/d‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ E-TTL II‬ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ٢٥٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ – ‪ ٦٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ٢٥٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ – ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪8C.Fn I -7: Flash sync. speed in‬‬
‫‪ 8) [Av mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٧ – ١‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) (Av‬ﺹ ‪ ،(٢٠٧‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ‪) *Auto :٠‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ*(‬
‫• ‪ ٦٠/١ – ٢٥٠/١) 1/250 - 1/60 sec. auto :١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫• ‪ ٢٥٠/١) 1/250 sec. (fixed) :٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ((‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ٢٥٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ – ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫* ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٥٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ )ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ(‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١١‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫]ﻣﺘﺮ‪/‬ﻗﺪﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ[‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪3200‬‬
‫‪1600‬‬
‫‪800‬‬
‫‪400‬‬
‫‪200‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪٦٢ / ١٩ ٤٦ / ١٤ ٣١ / ٩٫٥ ٢٣ / ٧ ١٦ / ٥ ١٢ / ٣٫٥ f/3.5‬‬
‫‪٥٦ / ١٧ ٣٩ / ١٢ ٢٨ / ٨٫٥ ٢٠ / ٦ ١٣ / ٤ ١٠ / ٣‬‬
‫‪f/4‬‬
‫‪٣٩ / ١٢ ٢٨ / ٨٫٥ ٢٠ / ٦ ١٥ / ٤٫٥ ١٠ / ٣‬‬
‫‪٧/٢‬‬
‫‪f/5.6‬‬
‫‪6400‬‬
‫‪٨٩ / ٢٧‬‬
‫‪٧٩ / ٢٤‬‬
‫‪٥٦ / ١٧‬‬
‫‪H: 12800‬‬
‫‪١٢٨ / ٣٩‬‬
‫‪١١٢ / ٣٤‬‬
‫‪٧٩ / ٢٤‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ٣,٣/‬ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ٣,٣/‬ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣُﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺑﻚ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﻻﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ ً‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪) EX‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Red-eye On/Off‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٢‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٣/١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<E‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <y‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪ (٧٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ 2) [2 Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬
‫‪ EX‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺳﻴﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬
‫‪ ،EX‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ>‪.<2‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪EX‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫‪١١٣‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ :B‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻷﻱ ﺟﺰء‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <D‬ﻟﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<D‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(8) .<B‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪) "FEL‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<d‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<B‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ>‪ .<D‬ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪١١٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]*** ‪) [External flash‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ***( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Flash control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Flash control‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Flash firing‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Enable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻻ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫]‪) [Built-in flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [External flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ ]‪) [Built-in flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [External flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪External flash func.‬‬
‫‪) [setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Built-in flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ( ﺃﻭ ]‪External flash‬‬
‫‪) [func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻫﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ]‪) [Built-in flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ( ﻭ]‪External flash‬‬
‫‪) [func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪[Built-in flash‬‬
‫]‪func. setting‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‬
‫‪[External flash‬‬
‫]‪func. setting‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪Flash mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪١١٦‬‬
‫‪Shutter sync.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪١١٧‬‬
‫*‪) FEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ*(‬
‫–‬
‫‪Flash exposure‬‬
‫‪compensation‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫*‪) Zoom‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ*(‬
‫‪Wireless setting‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪١١٣‬‬
‫‪١١٧‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪١١٩‬‬
‫* ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑـ ]‪) [FEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭ]‪) [Zoom‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫‪) Flash mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [E-TTL II‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Manual flash‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ( ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺮﻏﺒﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪Flash‬‬
‫‪) [output‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( )‪ ١/١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (١٢٨/١‬ﺑﺄﻧﻔﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [MULTI flash‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ( ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺮﻏﺒﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Flash output‬‬
‫)ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭ]‪) [Frequency‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ( ﻭ]‪Flash‬‬
‫‪) [count‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ( ﺑﺄﻧﻔﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺄﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫‪١١٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Shutter sync.‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1st curtain‬ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ( ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [2nd curtain‬ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﺛﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻛﺎﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﻟﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻓﻼﺷﺎﻥ؛ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻣﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Hi-speed‬‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫‪) Flash exposure compensation‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "‪ y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١١٣‬‬
‫‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Evaluative‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Average‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺲ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Wireless setting‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١١٩‬‬
‫‪) Clear flash settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [Built-in flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [External flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <B‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١١٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [External flash C.Fn setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٠٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Clear ext. flash C.Fn set.‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﻣﻦ َﺛﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪) Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٢٤‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺄﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﻡ‬
‫)‪ ٤٩٫٢‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻡ‬
‫)‪ ٣٢٫٨‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﻡ )‪ ٣٩٫٤‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ( ‪ ٨‬ﻡ )‪ ٢٦٫٢‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪١١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﻡ )‪ ٤٩٫٢‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﻡ‬
‫)‪ ٣٩٫٤‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﻡ )‪ ٢٦٫٢‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻡ )‪ ٣٢٫٨‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪◦٨٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻭﻣﻦ ‪٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٨‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﻭ>‪ <1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫>‪ <3‬ﻭ>‪ <2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻟﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﺒﺜﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Flash control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Flash control‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Built-in flash func. setting‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Built-in flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٢٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Flash mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Flash mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪ [E-TTL II‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪N‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Wireless func.‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Wireless func.‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [0‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Wireless func.‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Channel‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ( ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Channel‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (٤‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻃﻠﻖ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻹﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺹ ‪.(١١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪) [Wireless func.‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ [E-TTL II‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Evaluative‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]‪[Firing group‬‬
‫)ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ( ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻧﺒﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Flash mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[MULTI flash‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﻡ )‪ ٤٩٫٢‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﻡ‬
‫)‪ ٣٩٫٤‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﻡ )‪ ٢٦٫٢‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻡ )‪ ٣٢٫٨‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫‪◦٨٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Wireless func.‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١٢١‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[0:3‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Wireless func.‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [1:2‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١:٨‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.١:١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫‪) ١:١‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ (٨:١‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﺎﻓﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٦٢‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١:٨‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١:١‬ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺐ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١:٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١:١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ )ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٢/١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Firing group‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪E-TTL II :‬‬
‫‪Flash mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪) Evaluative :‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‬
‫‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫‪0 : Wireless func.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪) Channel‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ( ‪) :‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫])‪ [1 (A+B+C‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﻡ )‪ ٤٩٫٢‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﻡ‬
‫)‪ ٣٩٫٤‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﻡ )‪ ٢٦٫٢‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻡ )‪ ٣٢٫٨‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪◦٨٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫)ﺳﻮﺍء ﻛﺎﻥ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(C‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Firing group‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪ ،[1 (A+B+C‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪N‬‬
‫])‪ [1 (A:B‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﻡ )‪ ٤٩٫٢‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﻡ‬
‫)‪ ٣٩٫٤‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ( ‪B‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﻡ )‪ ٢٦٫٢‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻡ )‪ ٣٢٫٨‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ A‬ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫‪◦٨٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻴﻦ ‪A‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،B‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) A‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪(A‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪B‬‬
‫)ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ (B‬ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Firing group‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[1 (A:B‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [A:B fire ratio‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ ‪(A:B‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١:٨‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١:١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٨:١‬ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺐ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١:٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١:١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣:١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ )ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢/١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪N‬‬
‫])‪ [1 (A:B C‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﻡ )‪ ٤٩٫٢‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﻡ‬
‫)‪ ٣٩٫٤‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ( ‪B‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﻡ )‪ ٢٦٫٢‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻡ )‪ ٣٢٫٨‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪◦٨٠‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫])‪ [1 (A:B‬ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻀﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻴﻦ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪.B‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) A‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ (A‬ﻭ‬
‫‪) B‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ (B‬ﻭ‪) C‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪(C‬‬
‫ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻬﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Firing group‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[1 (A:B C‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [A:B fire ratio‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ ‪(A:B‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ C‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Firing group‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪ ،[1 (A:B‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪C‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ C‬ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١١٩‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.١٢٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Firing group‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﻡ )‪ ٤٩٫٢‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﻡ‬
‫)‪٣٩٫٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪◦٨٠‬‬
‫]‪[1 (A+B+C) 2‬‬
‫‪١٢٦‬‬
‫‪Flash mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫‪) Evaluative :‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‬
‫‪[0+3] : Wireless func.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪) Channel‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ( ‪) :‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Firing group‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﻡ )‪ ٤٩٫٢‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﻡ )‪ ٤٩٫٢‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻡ )‪ ٣٢٫٨‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﻡ )‪ ٢٦٫٢‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪E-TTL II :‬‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﻡ‬
‫)‪ ٣٩٫٤‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ( ‪B‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﻡ )‪ ٢٦٫٢‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻡ )‪ ٣٢٫٨‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪◦٨٠‬‬
‫]‪[1 (A:B) 2‬‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﻡ‬
‫‪ ٣٩٫٤) A‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻡ )‪ ٣٢٫٨‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﻡ )‪ ٢٦٫٢‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪◦٨٠‬‬
‫]‪[1 (A:B C) 2‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Flash mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[E-TTL II‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ]‪) [Wireess func.‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ﻭ]‪) [Firing group‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Flash exp. comp‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ 2) [2 exp. comp.‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ 1) [1 exp. comp.‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[A,B exp. comp.‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪(B ،A‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻴﻦ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪.B‬‬
‫]‪) [Grp.C exp. comp‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪(C‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪.C‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Flash mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[E-TTL II‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <B‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪.(FE‬‬
‫‪١٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪N‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Flash mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Manual flash‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )]‪ 1) [1 flash output‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Group A output‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ (A‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Wireless func.‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪[0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫])‪[0 (A,B,C‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﻓﺮﺩﻳًﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫)‪ A‬ﻭ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ (C‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[0+3‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﻓﺮﺩﻳًﺎ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[0 (A,B,C) 3‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﻓﺮﺩﻳًﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫)‪ A‬ﻭ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ (C‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٨‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪EOS‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻛﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ً‬
‫ﻓﻼﺷﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ .EX‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪.EX‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlit‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Macro Lites‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪،(١١٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Flash exp. comp‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭ]‪ [E-TTL II‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫]‪) [External flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ ،EX‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Shutter sync.‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪ (.‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ TTL‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪EX‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EZ/E/EG/ML/TL‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ TTL‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،A-TTL‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <a‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <f‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٢٥٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ٦٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٣٠/١‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻣﻠﻮﻟﺐ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﻗﻄﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪ z) [z Silent shoot.‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( )ﺹ ‪ .(١٣٧‬ﻟﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺟﻬ ًﺪﺍ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٥٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﺴﻜﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪.٪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٤٥-١٣٨‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ[‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪٪٥٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ °٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ °٧٣ /‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪٢٣٠‬‬
‫‪٢٢٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ °٠‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ °٣٢ /‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪٢٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪) CIPA‬ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ °٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ °٧٣/‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪.١٤٧-١٤٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺻﻮﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪ 5) [5 Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪ .(٤٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[5 Auto power off‬‬
‫)‪ 5‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧٧-١٧٦‬‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(FEB‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫•‪ : d‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫•‪ : c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫•‪ : f‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Expo. simulation: Enable‬ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺹ ‪ .(٢٢٨‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [u Live mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <g‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ >‪ ،<g‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <g‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻟﻚ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪A / B / R / f / y / i‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <o‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <n‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <A‬ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ>‪.<q‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ‪ ،f‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<f‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ً (AF‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ ،(AF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟـ >‪ <f‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (١١٠‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٥‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [z‬ﺑﺄﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Live View shoot.‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ ‪.(١٤٩‬‬
‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺹ ‪ (١٣٨‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[u Live mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺹ ‪ (١٣٩‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( )ﺹ ‪.(١٤٣‬‬
‫‪) Grid display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ]‪) [Grid 1l‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ (l ١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Grid 2m‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،(m ٢‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Expo. simulationN‬ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪(N‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪:‬‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٦‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪) Silent shootingN‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪(N‬‬
‫‪) Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(١‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٧٫٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﻄﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ TS-E‬ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[Mode 2‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(١‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫‪) Metering timerN‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪(N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ y) [y Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[6 Sensor cleaning‬‬
‫)‪ 6‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ 7) [7 Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪ 7) [7 Firmware Ver.‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻰ ]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [u Live mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (١٣٩‬ﻭ]‪[Quick mode‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( )ﺹ ‪.(١٤٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(١٤٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪d :‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.< > (AF‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪١٣٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ )ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‪c :‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<q‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ >‪ <q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ < > (AF‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<f‬ﻓﺄﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭ ً‬
‫ﻣﺎﺋﻼ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﺮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﻔﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <p‬ﺟﺰءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ ‪ .(١٣٨‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <p‬ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ < > (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺯﻣ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻬﺘﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪١٤١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺻﻌﺒﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻧﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﺿﺎءﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﺑﻌﻴﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎء ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺒﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪f :‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٨٥‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<Q‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻭ>‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪١٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٢‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٤‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<MF‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<u‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<u‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٢‬‬
‫‪١٤٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻈﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ 6) [6 LCD brightness‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﺯﺍ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪<E‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪) <E‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ َﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ >‪ <E‬ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ )ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٠٥‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪(٧٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪ 2) [2 Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ (FE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻱ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٧‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<k‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ‪.MOV‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Full HD 1080‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻝ ‪ Full HD 1080‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻎ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ‪) ١٠٨٠‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٩‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧٧-١٧٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ >‪ ،<a‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣ ًﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<k‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(١٤٥-١٣٨‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<0‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "‪ "o‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪.١٥٩-١٥٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻗﺮﺃ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ١٤٦‬ﻭ‪.١٤٧‬‬
‫‪١٥٠‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻘﻨﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Movie rec. size‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( )ﺹ ‪.(١٥٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) <A‬ﺹ ‪.(١٠٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ً (AE‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٦٤٠٠-١٠٠) ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (١٢٨٠٠‬ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪.<a‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (١٥٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء >‪.(<a‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(١٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ( ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ‪) IN‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(١٦‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) RC-1/RC-5‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (١١٠‬ﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﻮ >‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ >‪ .<k‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪،RC-1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <2‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <o‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ °٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫‪ °٧٣‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ °٠‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ °٣٢/‬ﻓﻬﺮﻳﻨﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥١‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫•‪ : d‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫•‪ : c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫•‪ : f‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺹ ‪ .(٢٢٨‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<B‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [u Live mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪) HDMI‬ﺹ ‪ ،(١٧٧‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ >‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٢‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <a‬ﺹ ‪ ،(١٠٢‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻤًﺎ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ .<6‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ >‪.<9‬‬
‫‪ ٤٠٠٠/١ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ٦٠/١ −‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫•‪8/7‬‬
‫• ‪ ٤٠٠٠/١ : 6 / 5 / 4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ٣٠/١ −‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<J‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪٦٤٠٠ − ١٠٠ :‬‬
‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٦٤٠٠ − ١٠٠ :‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ <Q‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻬﺘﺰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ 8) [8 C.Fn II -3: Highlight tone priority‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪:٣ - ٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ :١) [1: Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ‪.ISO 200 - 6400‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٢٥/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺍﻧﺴﻴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ" )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٦٣‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (Exif‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٣‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪ 1) [1 Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .(<a‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫‪) Canceled‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪ UDMA (Ultra DMA‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<a‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪i / A / B / R / f‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <o‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <n‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <A‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ >‪.<q‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<a‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،f‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<f‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ً (AF‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ ،(AF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟـ >‪ <f‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<B‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪.(<a‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ (<a‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٥‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<k‬ﻓﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ .[x‬ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ .١٤٤ -١٣٨‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [u Live mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ]‪Quick‬‬
‫‪) [mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Grid display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ]‪) [Grid 1l‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ (l ١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Grid 2m‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،(m ٢‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Movie-recording size‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬
‫]‪ : [1920x1080‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )‪.(Full HD‬‬
‫]‪ : [1280x720‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )‪.(HD‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.٣:٤‬‬
‫]‪[640x480‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ]‪) [9‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪ 6) [6 Video system‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( )‪ NTSC‬ﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻭﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻴﻚ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ PAL‬ﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ ﻭﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪٥٠٫٠٠ :7 ،٥٩٫٩٤ :8 ،٢٣٫٩٧٦ :4 ،٢٥٫٠٠ :5 ،٢٩٫٩٧ :6 :‬‬
‫‪١٥٦‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ١٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫]‪[1920x1080‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪ ٣٣٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫]‪[1280x720‬‬
‫]‪[640x480‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٣٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٤‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭ‪ ٣٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٦٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﻠﻎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﻣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<0‬‬
‫)ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺑﺄﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser‬ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﻼﺹ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ٢ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ]‪[1920x1080‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ]‪ [1280x720‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠,٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ]‪.[640x480‬‬
‫‪) Sound recording‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ( ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ‪) IN‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺹ ‪ .(١٦‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Silent shootingN‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪(N‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٧‬‬
‫‪) Metering timerN‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪(N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪١٥٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﺘﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ )ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ( ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ‪) IN‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Quick mode‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ً‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (١٥٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺫﻭ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﻳﺰﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫)ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ( ﺑﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٠٥‬‬
‫‪١٥٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﻧﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺳﺘﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻧﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪<E‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <E‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﻟﺤﻈﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﺹ ‪ ،(١٧٧‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <B‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) INFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺹ ‪ (١٧٧-١٧٦‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٩‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﻤﺎ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦١‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪+‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٦٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ −‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪(RGB/‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪<P‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،RAW+JPEG‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ >‪ <k‬ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ]‪ [MOV‬ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )]‪ [1920‬ﻭ]‪[1280‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪ .([640‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪ 4) [4 Highlight alert‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪ 4) [4 AF point disp.‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ ،(AF‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٣‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) RGB‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻓﻲ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪ 4) [4 Histogram‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺭﺳﻤًﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴًﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺴﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [RGB‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ RGB‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻭﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺸﺒﻌﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪) RGB‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﻌﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٤‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ H‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳُﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<I‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٥‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ I‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪ 4) [4 Image jump w/6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،(6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ]‪1 image/10 images/‬‬
‫‪[100 images/ Date/Folder/Movies/Stills‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ١٠/‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ١٠٠/‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Folder‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Movies‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ( ﻭ]‪) [Stills‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٦‬‬
‫‪ y/u‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١,٥‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.u‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ .<u‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <x‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٧‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ( ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪°٠ ← °٢٧٠ ← °٩٠ :‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ 5) [5 Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On zD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(zD‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (١٨٢‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪ 5) [5 Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On zD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.(zD‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٨‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٧٧ ،١٧٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪) HTC-100‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )‪ (Full HD 1920×1080‬ﻭﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫)‪ (HD 1280×720‬ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.MOV‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺻﻠﺐ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،HDMI IN‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٧٥ − ١٧١‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٩‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ PDF‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ZoomBrowser‬‬
‫‪) EX/ImageBrowser‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﻼﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ ،ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.PDF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﻪ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ .MOV‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٠‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫>‪ <1s‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻫﻮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [7‬ﻋﺮﺽ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧١‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ .<5‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ' ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ''‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (١٧‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪/‬‬
‫‪ °٧٣‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ ٣ :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٢٢٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺹ ‪ (١٧٧ − ١٧٦‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫‪١٧٢‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻭﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[X‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ )ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ ] [ )ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ >‪ <9‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪) <5‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﺒﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [7‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ] [ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [New file‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Overwrite‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ(‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻮﻯ ]‪) [Overwrite‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ( ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [ Slide show‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Slide show‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ j) j All images‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ n) n Folder‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ i) i Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [All images/Movies/Stills‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫]‪) j All images‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪k Movies/‬‬
‫)ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪) z Stills/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ([‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [Folder/Date‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻣﺎ ]‪[n Folder‬‬
‫)‪ n‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ i) [i Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ > ‪ <z‬ﺑﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ k) k Movies‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z) z Stills‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ]‪[Play time‬‬
‫)ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﻭ]‪) [Repeat‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫]‪) [Play time‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫]‪) [Repeat‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Start‬ﺑﺪء(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ٍ [Loading image...‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ (...‬ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ٍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [G‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪.١٧٧ − ١٧٦‬‬
‫‪١٧٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )‪(HD‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﻄﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ >‪ <q/C‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ >‪ <Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪.<q/C‬‬
‫)ﺃﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫)ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫)ﺃﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﻄﺮﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٧١‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ 6) [6 Video system‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼ‬
‫‪١٧٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )‪(HD‬‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) HTC-100‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪<D‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ >‪ <dHDMI MINI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪.<D‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٧١‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ >‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻄﻞ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪AV‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ >‪ <q/C‬ﻭ>‪ <D‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٧‬‬
‫‪ K‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Protect images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Protect images‬‬
‫)ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <K‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<K‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ .<M‬ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٤٣‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٨٠‬ﺳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫‪١٧٨‬‬
‫‪ L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌًﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧٨‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Erase‬ﻣﺴﺢ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻛﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Erase images‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪١٧٩‬‬
‫‪ L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Select and erase images‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Select and erase‬‬
‫‪) [images‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ .<I‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <X‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪ 3) [3 Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [All images in folder‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [All images on card‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٣‬‬
‫‪١٨٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ( ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [LCD brightness‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.(LCD‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[LCD brightness‬‬
‫)ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،(LCD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ ،<5‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(١٦٤‬‬
‫‪١٨١‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Auto rotate‬‬
‫)ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪) On zD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(zD‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) On D‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(D‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ‪) Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪)[On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٢‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﻓﻠﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ( ﻟﻧﻔﺽ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﺻﻘﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻠﺗﺻﻕ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺯﻳﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻘﻊ ﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸۳‬‬
‫‪f‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<2‬ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺭﻋﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻧﺗﺑﺎﻫﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻵﻥ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [6‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪Sensor‬‬
‫‪) [cleaning‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻵﻥ ‪.(f‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪[Clean now‬‬
‫)ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻵﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻳﺟﺭﻱ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺿﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺭﺭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﺗﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻛﺛﻳﺭً ﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ُﻌﻁﻼ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺑﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ (f‬ﻣ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto cleaningf‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ (f‬ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<1‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪.<2‬‬
‫‪۱۸٤‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺯﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺭﺅﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ( ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﺻﺎ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺿﺭ ﺟﺳﻣًﺎ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٥۰‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ )∞(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣُﺩﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[y‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪Dust Delete‬‬
‫‪) [Data‬ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸٥‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺧﺎﻟﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ۲۰‬ﺳﻡ ‪ ۳۰ -‬ﺳﻡ ‪ ۰,۷ /‬ﻗﺩﻡ ‪ ۱٫۰ -‬ﻗﺩﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺷﻛﻼ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻸ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﺟﺳﻡ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺧﺎﻟﺹ ﻻ ﻳﺄﺧﺫ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﻟﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.f/22‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ( ﻭﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻧﺟﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺧﺑﺭﻙ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء "ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ" ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻬﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﺩ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺧﺎﻟﺹ ﻛﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸٦‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ‬
‫ﻫﻭﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺭﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺑﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻭﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [6‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪Sensor‬‬
‫‪) [cleaning‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Clean manually‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪[Clean manually‬‬
‫)ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺳﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻭﻣﺽ "‪ "CLn‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪) ACK-E6‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ،AA/LR6‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸۷‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪N‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻁﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﺫﻛﺭﻫﺎ ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﻠﻑ ﺳﺗﺎﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫• ﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺗﺟﻭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺭﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺑﺣﺫﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻓﺭﺷﺎﺓ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻷﻥ ﻓﺭﺷﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺩﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗُﺩﺧﻝ ﻁﺭﻑ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺧﻠﻑ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻠﻑ ﺳﺗﺎﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻁﻠﻘﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻧﻔﺦ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺟﻣﺩ ﺭﺫﺍﺫ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪۱۸۸‬‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۱۹۰‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﻭﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ "‪ ،"wPictBridge‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪) (DPOF‬ﺹ ‪(۱۹۹‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪ (DPOF‬ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﻁﺎء ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪۱۹۰‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻑ >‪q/‬‬
‫‪ <C‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺟﺎﻧﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗُﺻﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪wPictBridge‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ CP Direct‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Bubble Jet Direct‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺩﻭﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ،٥‬ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﻳﺩﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻣﻭﻁﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪.(۱۹۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW‬ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ )ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ( ﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪) ACK-E6‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹۱‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۹٤‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ )ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺹ( )ﺹ ‪.(۱۹۷‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻭﻋﻪ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﻟﺑﺩء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻭﻋﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫*ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۱۹۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪Q‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪Y‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪،Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪U‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪Bordered‬‬
‫)ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺩ(‬
‫‪Borderless‬‬
‫)ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ(‬
‫‪Borderedc‬‬
‫)ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺩ ‪(c‬‬
‫‪) xx-up‬ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪20-upc‬‬
‫)‪ ۲۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪35-upp‬‬
‫)‪ ۳٥‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪Default‬‬
‫)ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ(‬
‫ﺳﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻧُﺳﺦ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺳﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ* ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۱۳×۹‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ ﺣﺟﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ۲‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۸‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۹‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۱٦‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۲۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ۲۰‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۳٥‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪) (DPOF‬ﺹ ‪ ،(۱۹۹‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ A4‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Letter‬‬
‫• ]‪ ۲۰) [20-upc‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ( ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ*‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻛﻠﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪.Exif‬‬
‫‪۱۹۳‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪) EOn‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﺑﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﺟﺯء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺎ ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ >‪،<z‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪<e‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۹٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪Exif‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) EOff‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) EVivid‬ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺩﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ENR‬ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ( ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪0 B/W‬‬
‫)ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻭﺩ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪0 Cool tone‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻫﺎﺩﺋﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺧﻔﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻝ ﻟﻠﺯﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪0 Warm tone‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺩﺍﻓﺋﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻓﺋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻝ ﻟﻠﺻﻔﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪) zNatural‬ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ "‪"Natural‬‬
‫‪zNatural M‬‬
‫)ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ(‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‬
‫)ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ(‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻳﻔﻭﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ "‪) "Natural‬ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) EDefault‬ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ( ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻳﻼ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻳﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﻳﻥ ]‪) [Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ( ﻭ]‪) [Adjust levels‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ( ﺑﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۱۹٦‬‬
‫‪۱۹٤‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ >‪ <I‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺭﻏﺑﺗﻙ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ >‪ <R‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧُﺳﺦ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <l‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧُﺳﺦ ﻫﻭ ‪) .۱‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧُﺳﺦ‪ (.‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ )ﺹ ‪ً (۱۹۷‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [Default‬ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ( ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺎ ﺣﺩﺩﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Default‬ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱۹۷‬ﻓﺳﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪) [Stop‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪ 7) [7 Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ ،(٤٥‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻳﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹٥‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ e‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ٤‬ﺑﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،۱۹٤‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <e‬ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ >‪ ،<z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<B‬ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪) Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Adjust levels‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ(‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺩﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺑﺎﻳﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪ <B‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ >‪ .<h‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻅﻝ )ﻣﻥ ‪ ۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (۱۲۷‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ )ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۲۸‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (۲٥٥‬ﻛﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺷﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪) kBrightener‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ(‬
‫ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﻛ ًﻧﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Red-eye corr.‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء(‬
‫ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﻌﻳﻥ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍ ]‪) [kBrightener‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ( ﻭ]‪) [Red-eye corr.‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Detail set.‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Saturation‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺑﻊ( ﻭ]‪) [Color tone‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ( ﻭ]‪) [Color balance‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ(‪ .‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Color balance‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ >‪ .<9‬ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ‪ M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ‪ G‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺩﺕ ]‪) [Clear all‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻳﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹٦‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻗﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻟﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻁﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﻭﻣﻛﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Trimming‬ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<I‬ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻐﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺭﻙ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻐﻁﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،<5‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ‪ ۱۰±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ۰٫٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <O‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹۷‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺣﺩﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺻﻐﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺗﺣﺑﺑًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧُﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻅﺭﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺩﻗﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺣﺑﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ( ﻭﺣﺩﺩﺕ ]‪[Continue‬‬
‫)ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ( ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺛﺕ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺄﻧﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻝ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Paper Error‬ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋً ﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Ink Error‬ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ(‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺧﺯﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻗﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Hardware Error‬ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ(‬
‫ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) File Error‬ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ(‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ‪ .PictBridge‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹۸‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫]‪) [Print type‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Print order‬ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Print order‬‬
‫)ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻥ ]‪) [Print type‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ(‬
‫‪۱۹۹‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫‪) Print type‬ﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫‪) Date‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫‪File number‬‬
‫)ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ(‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪Standard‬‬
‫)ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪) Index‬ﻓﻬﺭﺱ(‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪) Both‬ﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻧﻭﻋﻳﻬﺎ؛ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<7‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Sel.Image‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Byn‬ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ‪ (n‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[All image‬‬
‫)ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻟﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ( ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺣﺩﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗُﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﺛﻡ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ]‪) [Index‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪[File No.‬‬
‫)ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۰۰‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪) Sel.Image‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺭﺗﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪ <M‬ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ( ]‪) [Both‬ﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻭﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧُﺳﺦ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(۹۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Index‬ﻓﻬﺭﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻭﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫>‪ <X‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Byn‬ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ‪(n‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Byn‬ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ‪ (n‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪) Clear all‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ( ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩﺕ ﻣﺟﻠ ًﺩﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) All image‬ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫‪) Clear all‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺩﺕ "‪"Byn‬‬
‫)ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ‪ (n‬ﺃﻭ "‪) "All image‬ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻻ ﺗﻁﺑﻊ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺩﺕ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۰۱‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺯ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ .۱۹۰‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء "ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ" ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٥‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Print order‬ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪) [Print‬ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ( ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ(‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(۱۹۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (۱۹٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Bordered‬ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﺎﺗﺣً ﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻣﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺗﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ]‪) [Adjust levels‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺩﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Resume‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺅﻗﺗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺛﺕ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻅﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۱۹۸‬‬
‫‪۲۰۲‬‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺗﻔﺿﻳﻼﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ >‪ <w‬ﻭ>‪<x‬‬
‫ﻭ>‪ <y‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.F ،a ،f ،s ،d :‬‬
‫‪۲۰۳‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪.[8‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[8‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ،٥ - ۱‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺭﻏﺑﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ )ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ،۲‬ﺣﺩﺩ ])‪) [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ( ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۰٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) Exposure :۱‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Av‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۲۰٦‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۲۰۷‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪(<a>) k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) Image :۲‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺹ ‪۲۰۸‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪) k‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‬
‫‪) k‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۲۰۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) Autofocus/Drive :۳‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫‪۱۲‬‬
‫‪۱۳‬‬
‫ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻓﻰ ‪) AI SERVO/MF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ‬
‫ﺹ ‪۲۰۹‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۲۱۰‬‬
‫‪(f) k‬‬
‫‪(f) k‬‬
‫‪(f) k‬‬
‫‪(f) k‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۲۱۱‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۲۱۲‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۲۱۳‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۲۱٤‬‬
‫‪(f) k‬‬
‫‪(f) k‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۲۱٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) Operation/Others :٤‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ(‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Tv/Av‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺹ ‪۲۱٥‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪۲۱٦‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ‬
‫‪(<a>) k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪) k‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪) k‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ( ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪) .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫‪۲۰٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) Exposure :۱‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱ - ۱‬‬
‫‪Exposure level increments‬‬
‫)ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪ ۱/۳) 1/3-stop :۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫‪ ۱/۲) 1/2-stop :۱‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۱/۲‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻭﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۲ - ۱‬‬
‫‪ISO speed setting increments‬‬
‫)ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬
‫‪ ۱/۳) 1/3-stop :۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫‪ ۱) 1-stop :۱‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۳ - ۱‬‬
‫‪) ISO expansion‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬
‫‪) Off :۰‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) On :۱‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ "‪) "H‬ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻠﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(ISO 12800‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪٤ - ۱‬‬
‫‪) Bracketing auto cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ(‬
‫‪) On :۰‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﻳﻥ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ( ﻭ‪) WB-BKT‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺍ ﻟﻼﻧﻁﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ( ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪) Off :۱‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﻳﻥ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ( ﻭ‪) WB-BKT‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ( ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) .<2‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ(‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫‪۲۰٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪٥ - ۱‬‬
‫‪) Bracketing sequence‬ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ( ﻭﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪+ ،- ،۰ :۰‬‬
‫‪+ ،۰ ،- :۱‬‬
‫ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫)‪(AEB‬‬
‫‪ : ۰‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ ‪ :‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‬‫‪ : +‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫‪ : ۰‬ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫‪ : ۰‬ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ‬‫ ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬‫‪ : +‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ : +‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪٦ - ۱‬‬
‫‪) Safety shift‬ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ(‬
‫‪) Disable :۰‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Enable :۱‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ( )‪(Tv/Av‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ )‪ (s‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )‪ .(f‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﺎﻁﺊ ﻭﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۷ - ۱‬‬
‫‪Flash sync. speed in Av mode‬‬
‫)ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(Av‬‬
‫‪) Auto :۰‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺿﻭﻥ ‪ ۲٥۰/۱‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) 1/250-1/60 sec. auto :۱‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٦۰/۱-۲٥۰/۱‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )‪ ،(f‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺣﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻓﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺑﻬﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۲٥۰/۱) 1/250 sec. (fixed) :۲‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ )ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ((‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ۲٥۰/۱‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ۱‬ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻣﻧﻊ ﺑﻬﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺳﺗﺻﺑﺢ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪.۱‬‬
‫‪۲۰۷‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) Image :۲‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱ - ۲‬‬
‫‪Long exposure noise reduction‬‬
‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) Off :۰‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) Auto :۱‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻝ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪) On :۲‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻓﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺗﻬﻠﻙ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻗﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO 1600‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ۲‬ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻧﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۰‬ﺃﻭ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ،۲‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‪) "BUSY" ،‬ﻣﺷﻐﻭﻝ( ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۲ - ۲‬‬
‫‪) High ISO speed noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻅﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻳﻼﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Strong :۲‬ﻗﻭﻱ(‬
‫‪) Standard :۰‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫‪) Disable :۳‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Low :۱‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ،۲‬ﺳﻳﻘﻝ ﺑﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺿﺋﻳﻼ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۰۸‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۳ - ۲‬‬
‫‪) Highlight tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ(‬
‫‪) Disable :۰‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Enable :۱‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ﻧﺳﺑﺗﻪ ‪ ٪۱۸‬ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻧﺳً ﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ،۱‬ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ( ﻟﻣُﺣﺳﱢ ﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (۷٥‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻳﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ،۱‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻅﻝ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ،۱‬ﺳﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۲۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٦٤۰۰‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ>‪ <A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) Autofocus/Drive :۳‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱ - ۳‬‬
‫‪) AI Servo tracking sensitivity‬ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﺋﻕ( ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ]‪) [Slow‬ﺑﻁﻲء(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻘﻝ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﺋﻕ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ]‪) [Fast‬ﺳﺭﻳﻊ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺟﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺑﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۰۹‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۲ - ۳‬‬
‫‪) AI Servo 1st/2nd image priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪(AI Servo‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻭﺿﻌﻲ ‪) AI Servo AF‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ (AI Servo‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ Servo‬ﻭﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AF priority/Tracking priority :۰‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗُﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗُﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AF priority/Drive speed priority :۱‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗُﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺗُﻣﻧﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Release/Drive speed priority :۲‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗُﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺗُﻣﻧﺢ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪.۱‬‬
‫‪) Release/Tracking priority :۳‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗُﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗُﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۳ - ۳‬‬
‫‪) AI Servo AF tracking method‬ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪(AI Servo‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﺟﺄﺓ )ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪ :‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﻋﺷﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻫﻭ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﻧﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﻁ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪) Main focus point priority :۰‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﻁ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺏ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Continuous AF track priority :۱‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﻫﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺋﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻭﻳﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻋﺗﺭﺍﺽ ﻋﻭﺍﺋﻕ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻋﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱۰‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪٤ - ۳‬‬
‫‪Lens drive when AF impossible‬‬
‫)ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Focus search on :۰‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Focus search off :۱‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺗﻣﻧﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ؛ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪٥ - ۳‬‬
‫‪) AF Microadjustment‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ۲۰±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫)‪) Forward :-‬ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ( ‪) Backward :+ /‬ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ((‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻹﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭًﺍ )‪ ،(73‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺭﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ۱‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،۲‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ>‪.<L‬‬
‫‪) Disable :۰‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Adjust all by same amount :۱‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺩﺭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Adjust by lens :۲‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲۰‬ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺃﺟﺭﻳﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺳﻳﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺃﺟﺭﻳﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ۲۰‬ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻭﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱۱‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﺿﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ،۲‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺿﺎﻋﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻋﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ )ﺹ ‪ .(۲۰٤‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ]‪) [0: Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪٦ - ۳‬‬
‫‪) Select AF area selection mode‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻹﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ >‪.<X‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪[Apply‬‬
‫)ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺩﺕ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ( ﺛﻡ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ>‪،<0‬‬
‫ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ >‪.<X‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺩﺕ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ( ﺛﻡ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻓﺳﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ ۱۹‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ )ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ(‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۷ - ۳‬‬
‫‪Manual AF point selection pattern‬‬
‫)ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟـ ‪ ۱۹‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Stops at AF area edges :۰‬ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻳﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Continuous :۱‬ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱۲‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۸ - ۳‬‬
‫‪) VF display illumination‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Auto :۰‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻓﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Enable :۱‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Disable :۲‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۹ - ۳‬‬
‫‪) Display all AF points‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Disable :۰‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ )ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﻧﺷﻁ )ﺍﻟﻧﺷﻁﺔ( ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻓﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Enable :۱‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۰ - ۳‬‬
‫‪Focus display in AI SERVO/MF‬‬
‫)ﻋﺭﺽ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻓﻰ ‪(AI SERVO/MF‬‬
‫‪) Enable :۰‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﻋﺷﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ )ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ >‪ <S‬ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪) Disable :۱‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﻋﺷﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ )ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ >‪ <S‬ﺑﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱۳‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۱ - ۳‬‬
‫‪) AF-assist beam firing‬ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪.EOS‬‬
‫‪) Enable :۰‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫‪) Disable :۱‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪) Enable external flash only :۲‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،EOS‬ﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻁﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) IR AF assist beam only :۳‬ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlites‬ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،EOS‬ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ( ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ]‪) [AF-assist beam firing‬ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ‪ -‬ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ - EOS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Disabled‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﺗُﻁﻠﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ ۳/۲/۰-۱۱ - ۳‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۲ - ۳‬‬
‫‪) Orientation linked AF point‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ( ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻟﻛﻼ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Same for both vertical/horizontal :۰‬ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻛﻼ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ( ﻟﻛﻼ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Select different AF points :۱‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ( ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻛﻝ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )‪ .۱‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ‪ .۲‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ‪ .۳‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻝ(‪ .‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ( ﻟﻛﻝ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)‪ .۱‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ‪ .۲‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ‪ .۳‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ( ﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۳ - ۳‬‬
‫‪) Mirror lockup‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ(‬
‫‪) Disable :۰‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Enable :۱‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﺳﻠﺑًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺭﺏ(‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ۱۰۹‬ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) Operation/Others :٤‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱ - ٤‬‬
‫‪) Custom Controls‬ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺻﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻔﺿﻳﻼﺗﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻭﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻭ>‪.<9‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۲۱۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۲ - ٤‬‬
‫‪) Dial direction during Tv/Av‬ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(Tv/Av‬‬
‫‪) Normal :۰‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪) Reverse direction :۱‬ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻛﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺻﻳﻥ>‪ <6‬ﻭ>‪ .<5‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ .<6‬ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۳ - ٤‬‬
‫‪Add image verification data‬‬
‫)ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Disable :۰‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Enable :۱‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺃﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ )ﺹ ‪ ،(۱٦۳‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ‪OSK-E3‬‬
‫)ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺯﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻓﻙ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.OSK-E3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪٤ - ٤‬‬
‫‪Add aspect ratio information‬‬
‫)ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ(‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻥ َﺛﻡ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺣﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﺛﻝ ‪ ٦×٦‬ﺳﻡ‬
‫ﻭ‪ ٤٫٥×٦‬ﺳﻡ ﻭ‪ ٥×٤‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻗﺗﺻﺎﺻﻬﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻓﻕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Off :۰‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) Aspect ratio 6:6 :۱‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪(٦:٦‬‬
‫‪) Aspect ratio 3:4 :۲‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪(٤:۳‬‬
‫‪) Aspect ratio 4:5 :۳‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪(٥:٤‬‬
‫‪) Aspect ratio 6:7 :٤‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪(۷:٦‬‬
‫‪) Aspect ratio 10:12 :٥‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪(۱۲:۱۰‬‬
‫‪) Aspect ratio 5:7 :٦‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪(۷:٥‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) Custom Controls :۱ - ٤‬ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪8C.Fn IV -1: Custom‬‬
‫‪) [Controls‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:۱ - ٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(۲۱۸‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺻﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺯﺭًﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‪ [z‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻭﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ۲۱۹‬ﻭ‪.(۲۲۰‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻅﻬﺭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱۷‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫*‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺑﺩء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۲۱۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪z‬‬
‫‪AI SERVO‬‬
‫‪۲۲۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪۲۲۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪M‬‬
‫‪k k‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪M‬‬
‫‪k k‬‬
‫‪*k ۱*k k‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪*k‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪*k‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪*k k‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪RAW+JPEG‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪۲۲۰‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪۲۲۱‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ )ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪۲۲۱‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱۸‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪N‬‬
‫>‬
‫< ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫*‪ :۱‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ]‪) [Metering and AF start‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﻟﻠﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <p‬ﻭ>‪ <A‬ﻭﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﻭﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ>‪ <B‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ .۲۱۷‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [AF start point‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Registered AF point‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) [Orientation linked AF point] ۱۲- ۳‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ( )ﺹ ‪ (۲۱٤‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Select different AF points‬‬
‫)ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻟﻼﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ )ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ( ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﻋﺷﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(۸۸‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <S‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<U‬ﺳﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺻﻔﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ ﻛﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ >‪.<w‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ ،۱-۱۲- ۳‬ﻓﺳﺟﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <p‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <A‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺟﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻱ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻳﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<S‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺋﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪7 Clear all camera‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫>‬
‫< ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.AI Servo‬‬
‫‪۲۱۹‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪N‬‬
‫>‬
‫< ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪ (۸۷‬ﻭﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (۲۰۹‬ﻭﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪) AI Servo‬ﺹ ‪ (۲۱۰‬ﻭﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪) AI Servo‬ﺹ ‪ .(۲۱۰‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻓﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.AI Servo‬‬
‫*‪ :۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ۳‬ﺑﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،۲۱۷‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ، <B‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫>‬
‫< ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪AI SERVO z‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ .AI Servo‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ ،Al Servo‬ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ Al Servo‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻫﺩﻑ ﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻭﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫>‬
‫< ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<S‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ .<9‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،<5‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :۳‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ۳‬ﺑﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،۲۱۷‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ ]‪Switch to center‬‬
‫‪) [AF point‬ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻱ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﺃﻭ ]‪Switch to‬‬
‫‪) [registered AF point‬ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫>‬
‫< ﺑﺩء ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫> < ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫>‬
‫< ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻁﻼﻕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫>‬
‫< ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪M‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ >‪) <4‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<6‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫>‬
‫< ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪M‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ >‪) <4‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫‪۲۲۰‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪N‬‬
‫> < ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪ (٥۸‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫> < ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [One-touch RAW+JPEG‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ( ﺑﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٦۱‬‬
‫>‬
‫< ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪ (٦٤‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫>‬
‫< ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫> < ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫>‬
‫< ﺑﺩء ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<1‬ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫>‬
‫< ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫>‬
‫< ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫> < ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫>‬
‫< ﺑﻼ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ )ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﻠﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۲۱‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [My Menu settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[9‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪My Menu‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪[Register‬‬
‫)ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺗﺔ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ‪My‬‬
‫‪) Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ "ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ"‬
‫‪) Sort‬ﻓﺭﺯ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ(‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Sort‬ﻓﺭﺯ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ ،[z‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪) Delete / Delete all items‬ﺣﺫﻑ‪/‬ﺣﺫﻑ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪) [Delete‬ﺣﺫﻑ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪) [Delete all items‬ﺣﺫﻑ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ( ﺑﺣﺫﻑ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Display from My Menu‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ً [9‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۲۲‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ >‪ <w‬ﻭ>‪ <x‬ﻭ>‪ <y‬ﺑﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻅﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻝ ﻟﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Camera user setting‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪Camera user‬‬
‫‪) [setting‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺣﻳﺛﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺹ ‪(۲۲٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ *‪ C‬ﺑﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ،۲‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Clear settings‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻌﻭﺩ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺭﺹ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪۲۲۳‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ +‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫]‪ [1‬ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ‪(E-TTL II‬‬
‫]‪ [2‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )‪ ،(AEB‬ﻣُﺣﺳﱢ ﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫]‪ [y‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫]‪ [z‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫]‪ [x‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫]‪ [4‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪w/6‬‬
‫]‪ [5‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫]‪ [6‬ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ )ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫]‪ [7‬ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬
‫]‪ [8‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <x‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <y‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫]‪) [7 Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ( ﻭ]‪8 Clear all‬‬
‫)‪) [Custom Func. (C.Fn‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻭ>‪ <x‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<y‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﺯﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ >‪ <w‬ﻭ>‪<x‬‬
‫ﻭ>‪) <y‬ﺹ ‪.(۲۲۸‬‬
‫‪۲۲٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‪N‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪.Exif‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Copyright information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪Copyright‬‬
‫‪) [information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Display copyright info.‬ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ( ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Delete copyright information‬‬
‫)ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ( ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ ]‪Enter‬‬
‫‪) [author’s name‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻟﻑ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Enter copyright details‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ٦۳‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺟﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<M‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۲٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‪N‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ >‪ <9‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <L‬ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪.۲‬‬
‫‪۲۲٦‬‬
‫‪۱۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﺟﻌﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﻟﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۲۷‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪B‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪Displays‬‬
‫‪) [camera settings‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‪،‬‬
‫]‪) [Displays shooting functions‬ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( )ﺹ ‪ (۲۲٥‬ﻭ]‪[Electronic level‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ( )ﺹ ‪.(٤۸‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[7‬ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪INFO.‬‬
‫‪) [button display options‬ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺯﺭ ‪ (INFO.‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻹﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ >‪.<X‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ‪ w‬ﻭ‪ x‬ﻭ‪y‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٨٢‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٤ ،٧٣‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ*‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٠٨‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٠٨‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٥٩ ،٢٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٤٤‬‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.WFT-E5A/B/C/D‬‬
‫‪۲۲۸‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪B‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ*‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ِّ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ >‪ <y‬ﺇﻟﻰ >‪.<C‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<Q‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ )ﺹ ‪.(۳۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <o‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <n‬ﺃﻭ >‪،<S‬‬
‫ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺳﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ( AF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ >‪.<9‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ "‪) "Shooting settings display‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۲۹‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻓﺭﻳﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Battery info.‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (۲۸‬ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪.٪۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﺧﺿﺭ(‪ :‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﺧﺿﺭ(‪ :‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﺣﻣﺭ(‪ :‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺷﺭﺍء ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ .LP-E6‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻁﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺗﻳﻥ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،BG-E7‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ AA/LR6‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،BG-E7‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺣﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﺟﺎﺡ ﻟﺳﺑﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻵﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ >‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]‪Cannot communicate‬‬
‫‪) [with battery‬ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ( ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۳۰‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪[Register‬‬
‫)ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺗﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺑﺄﺣﺭﻑ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<M‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪) Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳُﻌﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻣﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ AA/LR6‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ BG-E7‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ‪.ACK-E6‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺳﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪ .‬ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۲۳۳‬‬
‫‪۲۳۱‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﺻﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺇﻟﺻﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ LP-E6‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﻣﺭﻳﺣً ﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻳﻘﺩﺭ ﺑﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ۲٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ × ‪ ۱٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ۱٫۰ /‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ × ‪ ۰٫٦‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺗﺟﻭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ )ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﻟﻳﺱ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺭﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻊ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺯء ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ .۲‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺣﻳﻼ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺻﻌﺑًﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۳۲‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣ ّ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ُﺭﻛﺑﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺧﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺁﺧﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Delete battery info.‬ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ۲۳۱‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Delete battery info.‬ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ >‪.<X‬‬
‫ﻛﺭﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻅﻬﺭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ۱‬ﺳﺗﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻅﻬﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۳۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ‪) ACK-E6‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻕ ﺑﺷﺄﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻭﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﺣﺫﺭ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺗﺟﻭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺳﻠﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﺣﺭﺹ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺛﺑﺕ ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪۲۳٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ )ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ( ﺑﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺑﻠﻎ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻋﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻋﻭﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ‪ CR1616‬ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ )ﺹ ‪.(٤۲‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫)–( )‪(+‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺑﻳﻥ ‪.– +‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻙ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ‪.CR1616‬‬
‫‪۲۳٥‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫‪ :o‬ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ‪ :k‬ﻳﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪RAW+JPEG‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫‪sRGB‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪Adobe RGB‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﱢ ﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‬
‫‪۲۳٦‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫‪ :o‬ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ‪ :k‬ﻳﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪AI Servo‬‬
‫‪AI Focus‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪۱۰‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﺧﻔﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪*k‬‬
‫‪*k‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪*k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫*‪ :۱‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ")‪ (۲‬ﺗﺑﻬﻳﺕ‪/‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ" ﺑﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.٥٤‬‬
‫*‪ :۲‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ")‪ (۳‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ" ﺑﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.٥٤‬‬
‫‪۲۳۷‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪) ۱‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫‪) Quality‬ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪) Red-eye On/Off‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء(‬
‫‪) Beep‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‬
‫‪86 / 76 / 84 / 74 / 83 / 73‬‬
‫‪61 / 41 / 1‬‬
‫‪٥۸‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪) On /‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪۱۱۲‬‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ‪) Off /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫–‬
‫‪Release shutter without‬‬
‫‪) card‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ( ‪) Disable /‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪۲۹‬‬
‫‪) Review time‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ(‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ( ‪8 sec. /‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪) 2 sec. /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﺎﻥ( ‪٤) 4 sec. /‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ( ‪) Hold /‬ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ(‬
‫)‪۸‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪Peripheral illumination‬‬
‫‪) correction‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ( ‪) Disable /‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪۷٦‬‬
‫‪) Flash control‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪) Flash firing‬ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪Built-in flash function setting /‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ( ‪External flash function setting /‬‬
‫‪۱۱٥‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ‪External flash C.Fn setting /‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ( ‪Clear external flash /‬‬
‫‪) C.Fn setting‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪) ۲‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫‪ Exposure compensation/‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ٥± ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ )ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ‪ ۳±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ(‬
‫‪) Disable Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ( ‪) Low /‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ( ‪) Standard /‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) Strong‬ﻗﻭﻱ(‬
‫)ﻣُﺣﺳﱢ ﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) White balance‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ‪P / O / I / U / Y / R / E / W / Q‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‬
‫)‪(۱۰۰۰۰ - ۲٥۰۰‬‬
‫‪) Custom WB‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ(‬
‫‪ :WB correction‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫‪) WB SHIFT/BKT‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫‪ :WB-BKT‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‬
‫‪) Color space‬ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ( ‪sRGB / Adobe RGB‬‬
‫‪) PStandard‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ( ‪) QPortrait /‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) RLandscape‬ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ( ‪) SNeutral /‬ﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) Picture Style‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) UFaithful‬ﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ( ‪) VMonochrome /‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) WUser Def. 1, 2, 3‬ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪(۳‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻣﺔ )‪.(C/1‬‬
‫‪۲۳۸‬‬
‫‪۱۰٥‬‬
‫‪۷٥‬‬
‫‪۷۰‬‬
‫‪۷۱‬‬
‫‪۷۳‬‬
‫‪۷٤‬‬
‫‪۸۲‬‬
‫‪٦۹-٦٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫‪ y‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪) ۳‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‬
‫‪) Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ(‬
‫‪One-touch RAW+JPEG‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‬
‫)ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫‪۱۸٥‬‬
‫‪٦۱‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪) ٤‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫‪Live View shooting‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ(‬
‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Grid display‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ(‬
‫‪Exposure simulation‬‬
‫)ﻣﺣﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) Silent shooting‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ(‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ( ‪) Disable /‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ( ‪) u Live mode /‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ( ‪) Quick mode /‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ(‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪) Grid 1l /‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪) Grid 2m / (l ۱‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪(m ۲‬‬
‫‪۱۳٦‬‬
‫‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫‪۱۳٦‬‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ( ‪) Disable /‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪۱۳٦‬‬
‫‪) Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Mode 2 / (۱‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪Disable / (۲‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪۱۳۷‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ( ‪ ۱٦) 16 sec. /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ( ‪ ۳۰) 30 sec. /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) Metering timer‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ‪ٍ ٤) 4 sec.‬‬
‫‪ ۱) 1 min.‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ( ‪ ۱۰) 10 min. /‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ( ‪ ۳۰) 30 min. /‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪۱۳۷‬‬
‫* ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۲٤۲‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪) ۱‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫‪) Protect images‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪) Rotate‬ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ(‬
‫‪) Erase images‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪) Print order‬ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ( ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫‪External media backup‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ( ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪) WFT-E5A/B/C/D‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‬
‫‪۱۷۸‬‬
‫‪۱٦۸‬‬
‫‪۱۷۹‬‬
‫‪۱۹۹‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪) ۲‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫‪) Highlight alert‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ( ‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ( ‪) Enable /‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫‪) AF point display‬ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ( ‪) Enable /‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Histogram‬ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ( ‪) Brightness / RGB‬ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ‪(RGB /‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪) Slide show‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪Image jump w/ 6‬‬
‫‪) image 1‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ( ‪ ۱۰) 10 images /‬ﺻﻭﺭ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ۱۰۰) 100 images‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪) Date /‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ‪Folder /‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ( ‪) Movies /‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪) Stills /‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪(6‬‬
‫‪۱٦۳‬‬
‫‪۱٦۳‬‬
‫‪۱٦٤‬‬
‫‪۱۷٤‬‬
‫‪۱٦٦‬‬
‫‪۲۳۹‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪) ۱‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ(‬
‫‪) Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) Auto rotate‬ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) Format‬ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ(‬
‫‪) File numbering‬ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‬
‫‪ ۱) 1 min.‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ( ‪ ۲) 2 min. /‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ( ‪ ٤) 4 min. /‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ۸) 8 min.‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ( ‪ ۱٥) 15 min. /‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ( ‪30 min. /‬‬
‫)‪ ۳۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ( ‪) Off /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) OnzD‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OnD / (zD‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪) Off / (D‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪) Continuous‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ( ‪) Auto reset /‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) Manual reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪) Select folder‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ( ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‬
‫‪) WFT settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪) WFT-E5A/B/C/D‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‬
‫‪(WFT‬‬
‫‪ Recording function+media‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫‪) select‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪+‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ( ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪) WFT-E5A/B/C/D‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪۱۸۲‬‬
‫‪٤۳‬‬
‫‪۸۰‬‬
‫‪۷۸‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪) ۲‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ(‬
‫‪) LCD brightness‬ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫‪) Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫‪) Manual‬ﻳﺩﻭﻱ(‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺳﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫‪۱۸۱‬‬
‫‪) Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ(‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ( ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ )ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﻭﺍﻧﻲ(‬
‫‪٤۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫‪) LanguageK‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬
‫‪) Video system‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ( ‪NTSC / PAL‬‬
‫‪) Auto cleaning‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪) Enable :‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Clean now‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻵﻥ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ(‬
‫‪) Clean manually‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ(‬
‫‪) VF grid display‬ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ(‬
‫‪۲٤۰‬‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ( ‪) Enable /‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫‪٤۲‬‬
‫‪۱۷٦‬‬
‫‪۱۸٤‬‬
‫‪۱۸۷‬‬
‫‪٤۷‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪) ۳‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‬
‫‪) Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪) Type‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ(‪) Remaining capacity ،‬ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) Shutter count‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) Recharge performance‬ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ(‪Battery ،‬‬
‫‪) registration‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪) Battery history ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪۲۳۰‬‬
‫‪INFO. button display‬‬
‫‪) options‬ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺯﺭ ‪(INFO.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ‪ /‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪۲۲۸‬‬
‫‪Camera user setting‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ‪ w‬ﺃﻭ ‪ x‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ y‬ﺑﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫‪۲۲۳‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ‪ /‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻟﻑ ‪ /‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ‪ /‬ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‬
‫‪۲۲٥‬‬
‫‪Copyright information‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ(‬
‫‪Clear all camera settings‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‬
‫‪) Firmware Ver.‬ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ(‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ )ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:۱‬‬
‫‪) Exposure‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪Image :۲‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:۳‬‬
‫‪) Autofocus/Drive‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:٤‬‬
‫‪Operation/ Others‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ(‬
‫‪Clear all Custom‬‬
‫)‪) Functions (C.Fn‬ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬
‫‪۲۰٦‬‬
‫‪۲۰۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ‬
‫‪۲۰۹‬‬
‫‪۲۱٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪۲۰٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪۲۲۲‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ )ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ(‬
‫‪My Menu settings‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ(‬
‫‪۲٤۱‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ x‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‬
‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ( ‪) u Live mode /‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪u‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ( ‪) Quick mode /‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ(‬
‫‪) Grid display‬ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ(‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪) Grid 1l /‬ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Grid 2m / (l۱‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪(m۲‬‬
‫‪/ (4 / 5 / 6) ۱۰۸۰x۱۹۲۰‬‬
‫‪/ (7 / 8) ۷۲۰x۱۲۸۰‬‬
‫‪(7 / 8) ٤۸۰x٦٤۰‬‬
‫‪Movie recording size‬‬
‫)ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ(‬
‫‪) Sound recording‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ(‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ‪) Off /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) Silent shooting‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪) Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Mode 2 / (۱‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪Disable / (۲‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ(‬
‫‪) Metering timer‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪۲٤۲‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ( ‪ ۱٦) 16 sec. /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ( ‪ ۳۰) 30 sec. /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪ٍ ٤) 4 sec.‬‬
‫‪ ۱) 1 min.‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ( ‪ ۱۰) 10 min. /‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ( ‪ ۳۰) 30 min. /‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ(‬
‫‪۱٥٦‬‬
‫‪۱٥٦‬‬
‫‪۱٥٦‬‬
‫‪۱٥۷‬‬
‫‪۱٥۷‬‬
‫‪۱٥۷‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ٪۹٤ (۲۳۰‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪ ،(Canon‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻧﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺑﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺻﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﺳﺑﺎﺏ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺿﻲء(‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻱ ﺳﺑﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ(‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(۲٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺩ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(۲٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻏﻠﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺗﺟﻭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(۲٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻏﻠﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫‪۲٤۳‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻘﻁﻌﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﺗﻧﻘﻁﻊ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻟﻌﺩﺓ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ )ﺹ ‪.(۲٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [7 Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺿﻌﻳﻔﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺧﺭﻯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ .(۲۳۰‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ )ﺹ ‪ (۳۸‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ ‪ ۱۳۱‬ﻭ‪ (۱٤۹‬ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎء ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [5 Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ )ﺹ ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﻓﺭﺍﻍ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(۱۷۹ ،۲۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺿﻭء ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(۹۲ ،۳٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ً‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(۲٦‬‬
‫‪۲٤٤‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( )ﺹ ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ )ﺹ ‪.(۳٥ ،۳٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪ IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻅﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺃﻭ ‪.۲٤۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn II -2: High ISO speed noise reduction‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ :۲ - ۲‬ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪Standard/Low/] :‬‬
‫‪) [Disable‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Strong‬ﻗﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺳﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ )ﺹ ‪.(۲۰۸‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻟﺩﻳﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ )ﺣﻘﻝ ﻋﺷﺑﻲ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻭﺳﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.٥۹‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ‪.ISO 100‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn II -3: Highlight tone priority‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:۳- ۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ‪ .ISO 100‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ‪) ISO 100‬ﺹ ‪.(۲۰۹‬‬
‫ﺑﻁء ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ >‪ <f‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ً‬
‫ﻟﻳﻼ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻣﻅﻠﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ( ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn I -7: Flash sync. speed in Av mode‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۷- ۱‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (Av‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ۱‬ﺃﻭ ‪) ۲‬ﺹ ‪.(۲۰۷‬‬
‫‪۲٤٥‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ ﻻ ﻳﻧﺑﻌﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ ﺑﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻧﺑﻌﺎﺙ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ( ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [z Silent shoot.‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬
‫ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻳﻼ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺁﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻧﺑﺛﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۳۳‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ‪) Live View Shooting‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )ﻻ ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ(‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ً‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻗﺎ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(۱٤٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ‪/‬ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [8C.Fn IV -1: Custom Controls‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:۱ - ٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ( )ﺹ ‪.(۲۱٥‬‬
‫‪۲٤٦‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎء ﻧﻔﺳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ‪ ۸‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺑﻠﻎ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻠﺕ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥۹‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭ ًﻧﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳًﺎ )ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳًﺎ( )ﺹ ‪.(۱٥۸‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺭﺽ )ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ( ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ً‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻣﺔ )‪ ،(C/1‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) F/a/f/s/d‬ﺹ ‪.(٤۰‬‬
‫‪۲٤۷‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [4 Highlight alert‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(۱٦۳‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺃﺣﻣﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [4 AF point disp.‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ( )ﺹ ‪.(۱٦۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ )"_‪.("_MG‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .sRGB‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ‪ ،Adobe RGB‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(۸۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻻ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﻥ ‪.۰۰۰۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(۸۰‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺻﺣﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻭﻗﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻠﺫﻳﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻭﻗﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﻳﻥ )ﺹ ‪.(٤۲‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ( ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۷۷ ،۱۷٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ )‪ (NTSC/PAL‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺹ ‪.(۲٤۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ( ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۷٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺭﺿﻪ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺳﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(۱۹٤‬‬
‫‪۲٤۸‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺛﺕ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻝ‬
‫‪Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the‬‬
‫‪) lens contacts.‬ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۱٦ ،۱۳‬‬
‫‪Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card‬‬
‫‪) with camera.‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٤۳ ،۲۹‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪) Cannot save images because card is full. Replace card.‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٤۳ ،۱۷۹ ،۲۹‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪The built-in flash could not be raised. Turn the camera off and‬‬
‫‪) on again.‬ﺗﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺹ ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪Sensor cleaning is not possible. Turn the camera off and on‬‬
‫‪) again.‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺹ ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫‪،20 ،10‬‬
‫‪،40 ،30‬‬
‫‪،60 ،50‬‬
‫‪80 ،70‬‬
‫‪Shooting is not possible due to an error. Turn the camera off and‬‬
‫‪) on again or re-install the battery.‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ‬
‫‪) Canon‬ﺹ ‪.(۲٦ ،۲۷‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺟﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻭﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪۲٤۹‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪۲٥۰‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪۲٥۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻛﺳﺔ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )‪ (AF/AE‬ﻣﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺩﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪ ۱‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،۲‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪UDMA‬‬
‫‪ ۱٤٫۹ × ۲۲٫۳‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪) Canon‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪(EF-S‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻳﺑﻠﻎ ‪ ۱,٦‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ‪ EF‬ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪Canon‬‬
‫• ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ‪CMOS‬‬
‫‪ ۱۸٫۰۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪۲:۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫• ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء‪/‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۲٫۰‬‬
‫‪) RAW ،JPEG‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ۱٤‬ﺑﺕ(‬
‫ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﻲ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۷٫۹۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )‪(۳٤٥٦ × ٥۱۸٤‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۸٫۰۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )‪(۲۳۰٤ × ۳٤٥٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٤٫٥۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )‪(۱۷۲۸ × ۲٥۹۲‬‬
‫ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۱۷٫۹۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )‪(۳٤٥٦ × ٥۱۸٤‬‬
‫‪:RAW‬‬
‫‪ ۱۰٫۱۰ :M-RAW‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )‪(۲٥۹۲ × ۳۸۸۸‬‬
‫‪ ٤٫٥۰ :S-RAW‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )‪(۱۷۲۸ × ۲٥۹۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪۳ - ۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺳﺑﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‪) ،‬ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻅﻝ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻡ‪ ،‬ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺟﺳﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺿﻭء‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﻭﺭﺳﻧﺕ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )‪ ۱۰۰۰۰-۲٥۰۰‬ﻛﻠﻔﻥ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺯﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫* ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﺵ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ :‬ﻣُﺣﺳﱢ ﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪۲٥۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺷﻭﺭ ﺧﻣﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ ٪۱۰۰‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۱٫۰‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )‪ ۱-‬ﻡ‪ ۱-‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٥۰‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺎﻻﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۲۲‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺩ ‪ ۱-‬ﻡ‪(۱-‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻧﻛﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‪ ۱٫۰+ - ۳٫۰- :‬ﻡ‪(dpt) ۱-‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻭﻱ ﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪ ،TTL‬ﻭﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪) ۱۹ :(AF‬ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ(‬
‫‪ ۱۸ - ۰٫٥‬ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻥ ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °۲۳‬ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ °۷۳/‬ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‪(ISO 100 ،‬‬‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Focus‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(MF‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪:(AF‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﻋﺷﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ ﺗﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪:ISO‬‬
‫)ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ‪ TTL‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٦۳‬ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫• ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ )ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪((AF‬‬
‫• ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ )‪ ٪۹٫٤‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ(‬
‫• ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ )‪ ٪۲٫۳‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ(‬
‫• ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ‬
‫‪ ۲۰ - ۱‬ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻥ ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °۲۳‬ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ °۷۳/‬ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫‪(ISO 100 ،EF50mm f/1.4 USM‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (AE‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ISO 100 - 3200‬‬
‫‪) ISO 100 - 6400 :B ،M ،Av ،Tv ،P‬ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ISO 12800‬‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻭﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ‪ ٥± :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۱/۲‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ )ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ‪ ۳±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪۲٥۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪ :(AE‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫‪ ۸۰۰۰/۱‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦۰/۱‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ‪ X‬ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ ۲٥۰/۱‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۸۰۰۰/۱‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ )ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ .‬ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺳﺣﺏ ﻳﻧﺑﺛﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،ISO 100) ۳۹/۱۲ :‬ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺗﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻡ(‬
‫ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۱٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻛﻣﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪) EX‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۳±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۱/۲‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ :(FE‬ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ﻭﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪۱۰‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻛﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ JPEG‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ (۱۲٦) ۹٤ :‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ (۱٥) ۱٥ :RAW‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ (٦) ٦ :‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫* ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ ISO 100‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ( ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻭﺍﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪(UDMA) Ultra DMA‬‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪۲٥٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ )ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ ۱۰/٥‬ﻣﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ ۲۰ - ۱‬ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻥ ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °۲۳‬ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ °۷۳/‬ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫‪(ISO 100 ،EF50mm f/1.4 USM‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ )ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪(۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻋﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪MPEG-4 AVC‬‬
‫ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭ )ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ(‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﺧﻁﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪MOV‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪) Full HD) ۱۰۸۰ × ۱۹۲۰ :‬ﻓﺎﺋﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ((‪30p/25p/24p :‬‬
‫‪60p/50p‬‬
‫‪) HD) ۷۲۰ × ۱۲۸۰‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ((‪:‬‬
‫‪60p/50p‬‬
‫‪:(SD) ٤۸۰ × ٦٤۰‬‬
‫* ‪ ۲۹٫۹۷ :30p‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ۲٥٫۰ :25p ،‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ۲۳٫۹۷٦ :24p‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ٥۹٫۹٤ :60p ،‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ٥۰٫۰ :50p‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳۳۰ :(30p/25p/24p) ۱۰۸۰ × ۱۹۲۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۳۳۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪:(60p/50p) ۷۲۰ × ۱۲۸۰‬‬
‫‪ ۱٦٥‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪:(60p/50p) ٤۸۰ × ٦٤۰‬‬
‫ﻧﻔﺱ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪ ۲۰ - ۰‬ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻥ ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °۲۳‬ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ °۷۳/‬ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫‪(ISO 100 ،EF50mm f/1.4 USM‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪) (AE‬ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ( ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪) ،ISO 100 - 6400‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ 12800‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪:ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ISO 100 - 6400‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ /‬ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﻣﺩﻣﺞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻋﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ TFT‬ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺑﻭﺻﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ‪ ۹۲۰۰۰۰‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ )‪ (VGA‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٪۱۰۰‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬
‫‪۲٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ‪ +‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۹‬ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ ۱۰ - ۱٫٥‬ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫• ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪۲٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺧﺭﺝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪/‬ﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﺭﺝ ‪ (HDMI‬ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪۱٫۱‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪۲۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ‪ C1‬ﻭ‪ C2‬ﻭ‪ C3‬ﺑﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ "ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ"‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪/‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺎﻅﺭﻱ )ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ‪/(NTSC/PAL‬ﺧﺭﺝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ ﻭﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ‪ USB‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺧﺭﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪) C‬ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺩﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﻘﻁﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۳٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪ :‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪N3‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ‪RC-1/RC-5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ‪WFT-E5A/B/C/D‬‬
‫• ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ً‬
‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪(CIPA‬‬
‫‪۲٥٦‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) LP-E6‬ﻋﺩﺩ ‪(۱‬‬
‫* ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ‪ACK-E6‬‬
‫* ﻣﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ BG-E7‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ‬
‫‪AA/LR6‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۸۰۰‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °۲۳‬ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ °۷۳ /‬ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‪ ۷٥۰ ،‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °۰‬ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ °۳۲ /‬ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۲۲۰‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °۲۳‬ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ °۷۳ /‬ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‪ ۲۱۰ ،‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °۰‬ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ °۳۲ /‬ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‪ ۲۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °۲۳‬ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ °۷۳ /‬ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‪ ۱۰‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °۰‬ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ °۳۲ /‬ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ(‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻕ(‪ ۷۳٫٥ × ۱۱۰٫۷ × ۱٤۸٫۲ :‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ۲٫۹ × ٤٫٤ × ٥٫۸ /‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ۸۲۰‬ﺟﻡ ‪ ۲۸٫۹ /‬ﺃﻭﻗﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ( ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ °٤۰ - °۰ :‬ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ °۱۰٤ - °۳۲ /‬ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫‪ ٪۸٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E6‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۷,۲‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻣُﻘﺩﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۱۸۰۰‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻕ(‪ ٥٦٫۸ × ۲۱ × ۳۸٫٤ :‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ۲٫۲ × ۰٫۸ × ۱٫٥ /‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ۸۰‬ﺟﻡ ‪ ۲٫۸ /‬ﺃﻭﻗﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺗﺎﻥ ﻭ‪ ۳۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۲٤۰ – ۱۰۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ )‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣُﻘﺩﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۸٫٤‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ۱٫۲/‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣُﻘﺩﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ °٤۰ - °٥ :‬ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ °۱۰٤ - °٤۱ /‬ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫‪ ٪۸٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻕ(‪ ۹۳ × ۳۳ × ٦۹ :‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ۳٫۷ × ۱٫۳ × ۲٫۷ /‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ۱۳۰‬ﺟﻡ ‪ ٤٫٦ /‬ﺃﻭﻗﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E6E‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۱‬ﻡ ‪ ۳٫۳ /‬ﺃﻗﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﻁﻭﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺗﺎﻥ ﻭ‪ ۳۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۲٤۰ – ۱۰۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ )‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣُﻘﺩﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۸٫٤‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ۱٫۲/‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣُﻘﺩﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ °٤۰ - °٥ :‬ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ °۱۰٤ - °٤۱ /‬ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫‪ ٪۸٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻕ(‪ ۹۳ × ۳۳ × ٦۹ :‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ۳٫۷ × ۱٫۳ × ۲٫۷ /‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ۱۲٥‬ﺟﻡ ‪ ٤٫٤ /‬ﺃﻭﻗﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪۲٥۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ‪EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺭ × ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭﻱ‪‘۱۸°۲٥ - ‘۸٤°۳۰ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪‘۱٥°۲٥ - ‘۷٤°۱۰ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪‘۱۰°۲٥ - ‘٥۳°۳۰ :‬‬
‫‪ ۱۷‬ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ‪ ۱۲‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪f/22 - 36‬‬
‫‪ ۰٫۳٥‬ﻡ ‪ ۱٫۱٥ /‬ﻗﺩﻡ )ﻣﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‬
‫‪ ۰٫۲۱‬ﻣﺭﺓ )ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ ۸٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ(‬
‫‪ ۱۰۸ × ۷۲ - ۳۹٥ × ۲٥٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ٤٫۳ × ۲٫۸ - ۱٥٫٦ × ۱۰٫۰ /‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ ۰٫۳٥‬ﻡ ‪ ۱٫۱٥ /‬ﻗﺩﻡ(‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۷۲‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫‪E-72U‬‬
‫‪ ۸۷٫٥ × ۸۱٫٦‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ۳٫٤ × ۳٫۲ /‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥۷٥‬ﺟﻡ )‪ ۲۰٫۳‬ﺃﻭﻗﻳﺔ( ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) EW-78E‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‬
‫‪) LP1116‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‬
‫• ‪EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺭ × ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪۲٥۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭﻱ‪‘۱۱°۳۰ - ‘۷٤°۲۰ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪‘۹°۳۰ - ‘٦٤°۳۰ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪‘٦°۲۰ - ‘٤٥°۳۰ :‬‬
‫‪ ۱٦‬ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ‪ ۱۲‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪f/22 - 36‬‬
‫‪ ۰٫٤٥‬ﻡ ‪ ۱٫٤۸ /‬ﻗﺩﻡ )ﻣﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( )ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ ۱۳٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ(‬
‫* ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۰٫۲۱‬ﻣﺭﺓ )ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ ۱۳٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ(‬
‫‪ ٥۰۳ × ۳۲۷‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ۱۹٫۸ × ۱۲٫۹ /‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ )ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ ۰٫٤۹‬ﻡ ‪ ۱٫٦۱ /‬ﻗﺩﻡ( ‪-‬‬
‫‪ ۱۱۲ × ۷٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ٤٫٤ × ۳٫۰ /‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ )ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ ۰٫٤٥‬ﻡ ‪ ۱٫٤۸ /‬ﻗﺩﻡ(‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٦۷‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫‪E-67U‬‬
‫‪ ۱۰۱ × ۷٥٫٤‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ٤٫۰ × ۳٫۰ /‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤٥٥‬ﺟﻡ ‪ ۱٦٫۰ /‬ﺃﻭﻗﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪) EW-73B‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‬
‫‪) LP1116‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ‪EF28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺭ × ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭﻱ‪°۱۸ - °۷٥ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪°۱٥ - °٦٥ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪°۱۰ - °٤٦ :‬‬
‫‪ ۱٦‬ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ‪ ۱۲‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪f/22 - 36‬‬
‫‪ ۰٫٥‬ﻡ ‪ ۱٫٦٤ /‬ﻗﺩﻡ )ﻣﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‬
‫‪ ۰٫۱۹‬ﻣﺭﺓ )ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ ۱۳٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ(‬
‫‪ ۱۲٥ × ۱۸۸ - ۳٥٥ × ٥٥۱‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ٤٫۹ × ۷٫٤ - ۱٤٫۰ × ۲۱٫۷ /‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ ۰٫٥‬ﻡ ‪ ۱٫٦٤ /‬ﻗﺩﻡ(‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۷۲‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫‪E-72U‬‬
‫‪ ۹٦٫۸ × ۷۸٫٤‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ۳٫۸ × ۳٫۱ /‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥۰۰‬ﺟﻡ ‪ ۱۷٫٦ /‬ﺃﻭﻗﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪) EW-78B II‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‬
‫‪) LP1116‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣُﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ Adobe‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Adobe Systems Incorporated‬‬
‫‪ CompactFlash‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.SanDisk Corporation‬‬
‫‪ Windows‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Apple Inc.‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.HDMI Licensing LLC‬‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺗﺧﺹ ﻣﺎﻟﻛﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻧﻳﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ ۲٫۰‬ﻭﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪) Exif 2.21‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳُﻌﺭﻑ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ‬
‫"‪ .("Exif Print‬ﻭ‪ Exif Print‬ﻫﻭ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ ،Exif Print‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٥۹‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫"ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺭﺧﺹ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺑﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺭﺍﻉ ‪ AT&T‬ﻟﻠﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ MPEG-4‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ MPEG-4‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻙ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ MPEG-4‬ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭﻩ ﻓﻘﻁ )‪ (۱‬ﻟﻸﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﻭﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ )‪ (۲‬ﻣﻥ ِﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻣﺭﺧﺹ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺑﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺭﺍﻉ ‪ AT&T‬ﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪.MPEG-4‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻧﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ﺻﺭﻳﺣً ﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺿﻣﻧﻳًﺎ ﻷﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪".MPEG-4‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺋﻕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﻋﻁﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺃﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪) Canon‬ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﺑﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻐﻁﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺟﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻋﻳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺩﻓﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.LP-E6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻣُﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﻋﻁﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪۲٦۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﻭﻓﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﻓﺎﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺋﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﻳﺏ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣٌﻌﺩﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻗﺻﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗُﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﻌﻛﺳﺔ )‪ .(- +‬ﻻ ﺗﻣﺯﺝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ‬‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ °۰‬ﻭ‪ °٤۰‬ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬‫)ﻭﺑﻳﻥ ‪°۳۲‬ﻭ‪ °۱۰٤‬ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ(‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﻌﺩ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺑﺗﻠﻊ ﻁﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﻣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻌﺎء‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺯﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻼﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺋﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺑﻌﺎﺙ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺧﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺑﻌﺎﺙ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺧﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﺯﻋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗُﺻﺎﺏ ﺑﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻣﻧﻊ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺩﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺳﻙ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻠﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﻭﻻﻣﺳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻳﻧﻳﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺩﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺳﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﻐﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺄﺛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻛﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻧﺎﻕ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺻﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻭﺩ ﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺱ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺻﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺷﺧﺹ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻁﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ۱‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺑﻳﻧﻙ ﻭﺑﻳﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﻟﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻏﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺋﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٦۱‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻧﻙ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺑﺑﺕ ﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺿﻭء ﺳﺎﻁﻊ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻑ ﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺻﺎﺭ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﻧﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻣﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻁﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺋﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻔﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺣً ﺎ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺑﻌﺛﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻔﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺋﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻗﻡ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﻳ ٍﺩ ﻣﺑﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻭﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻣﻧﻪ ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺧﺩﺵ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻁﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻧﻳﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺭﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﻲء ﺛﻘﻳﻝ ﻓﻭﻗﻪ‪ً .‬‬‫ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﺑﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻻ ٍ‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺑﺱ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ً‬‫ﺳﻠﻛﺎ ﻣﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻭﺛﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺯﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ‬
‫ﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻗﺻﺭ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺄﺧﺫ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺳﺧﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺩ ﺑﺣﺭﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﻧﺎ ﻭﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﻟﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ٍ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺑًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺭﻳﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﻣﺳﺑﺑﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ّ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻁﻭﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻣﺎﺵ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺣﺗﺑﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺳﻘﻁﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺷﻅﺎﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻳﻙ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺋﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺣﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺻﻳﺭ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻋﻣﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﺭﺍﻗﺎ ﻟﻠﺟﻠﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﺧﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ )ﺛﻧﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﻼء( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺯﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﺿﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﺧﻁﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﺻﻼﺣً ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻛﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪۲٦۲‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪DS126251‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺭﺓ ‪ ۱٥‬ﻣﻥ ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﻟﺟﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﺭﺍﻟﻳﺔ )‪ .(FCC‬ﻳﺧﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﻁﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﻳﻥ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (۱‬ﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺿﺎﺭ ﻭ)‪ (۲‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻘﺑﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ ﻓﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺛﺑﺕ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ﺏ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺭﺓ ‪۱٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﻟﺟﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﺭﺍﻟﻳﺔ )‪ .(FCC‬ﺗﻣﺕ ﺻﻳﺎﻏﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻘﻭﻟﺔ ﺿﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺯﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻭﻟّﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺻﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺿﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺿﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺛﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫— ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫— ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫— ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﻟﻠﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫— ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻧﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﻣﺗﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ﺏ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻳﺔ ﺏ ﻟﻠﻔﻘﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ۱٥‬ﻣﻥ ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﻟﺟﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﺭﺍﻟﻳﺔ )‪.(FCC‬‬
‫ﻳُﻧﺻﺢ ﺑﻌﺩﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺣﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳُﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻧﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪Canon U.S.A. Inc.‬‬
‫‪One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺭﻗﻡ‪(٥۱٦) ۳۲۸ -٥٦۰۰ :‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ﺏ ﻣﻊ ‪ ICES-003‬ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ‪ACK-E6‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ )ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣُﻘﺩﺭ‪ ۲٤۰ - ۱۰۰ :‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‪ ٦۰/٥۰ ،‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣُﻘﺩﺭ‪ ۸٫۰ :‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ(‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٦۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ — ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪ LC-E6‬ﻭ‪.LC-E6E‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ )‪ (۱‬ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪،‬‬
‫)‪ (۲‬ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ (۳) ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ — ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.LP-E6‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﺟﺭ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺳﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺟﺳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺛﻠﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﻳﻌﻬﺎ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺷﺭﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺟﺳﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۷‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻷﺣﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺷﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۸‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﺳﻠﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﻳﻥ ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻟﻬﻣﺎ ﺑﺂﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۹‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻘﻭﻁﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ؛ ﺑﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﺫﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺅﻫﻝ ﺟﻳ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۱۰‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ؛ ﺑﻝ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺄﺧﺫﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺅﻫﻝ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﺗﺩﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۱۱‬ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺭﺩ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺅﻫﻝ ﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﻛﻧﺩﺍ ﻓﻘﻁ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ‪/‬ﺑﻭﻟﻳﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪ 1-800-8-BATTERY‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻛﻧﺩﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺭﻛﻠﻭﺭﻳﺕ – ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٦٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۲٦٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۲٦٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۲٦۷‬‬
‫ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۲٦۸‬‬
‫ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۲٦۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٥٦ .................................... ۷۲۰ × ۱۲۸۰‬‬
‫‪۱٥٦ ................................... ۱۰۸۰ × ۱۹۲۰‬‬
‫‪۱٥٦ .......................................٤۸۰ × ٦٤۰‬‬
‫)‪ (MF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪۹۲ ........................‬‬
‫‪۸۲ .....................................Adobe RGB‬‬
‫‪) AI FOCUS‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۸٦ ........................................ (AI Focus‬‬
‫‪) AI SERVO‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۸٦ ................................... (AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ‪۲۱۰ ،۲۰۹ .............................‬‬
‫‪) Av‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ( ‪۱۰۰ ...‬‬
‫‪) C‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ( ‪٥۳ ................................‬‬
‫‪۲۲۳ ،۲۰ ............................. y ،x ،w‬‬
‫‪۱۹۹ ........................................... DPOF‬‬
‫‪) Full HD‬ﻓﺎﺋﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ( ‪۱٤۹ .......................‬‬
‫‪۱۷۷ ،۱٦۹ .....................................HDMI‬‬
‫‪٥۸ ............................................. JPEG‬‬
‫‪) M‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪۱۰۲ ....................‬‬
‫‪۲٤۰ ،۱٥٦ ................................... NTSC‬‬
‫‪) ONE SHOT‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ( ‪۸٥ .........................................‬‬
‫‪) P‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ( ‪۹٦ .......................‬‬
‫‪۲٤۰ ،۱٥٦ ....................................... PAL‬‬
‫‪۱۸۹ ..................................... PictBridge‬‬
‫‪) Q‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ( ‪۱٥٥ ،۱۳٥ ،۳۸ ...............‬‬
‫‪٦۰ ،٥۸ ......................................... RAW‬‬
‫‪٦۱ ،٥۹ ............................. RAW+JPEG‬‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻭﺩ‪٦۷ ،٦٥ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪۲۳۰ ،۲٥ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ‪۸۰ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ‪۲٤۱ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪۱۰۰ .........‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ‪۱۰۷ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪۳۷ ......................................LCD‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۲۱۳ .............................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪۲۱٦ ......‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪۲٤ ..........................................‬‬
‫‪۲۷۰‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ ‪۸۱ .................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪۸۱ .................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۲۲۳ ،۲۰ ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪۱٤۹ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۱٥٦ .......... (AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ‪۱۷۳ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ ‪۱۷۳ ..................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ‪۱٦۹ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪۱٥۷ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪۱٥٦ ................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪۱٥٦ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱٥۲ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ‪۱٥۳ .......................‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪۱٥۷ ...................‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪۱٥٦ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪۱۷۱ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪۱٥٥ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪۱٥۷ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ ‪۱٥۷ .............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ‪۱٥۷ ................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪۱٥٤ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪۱۷٦ ،۱٦۹ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ‪۸۱ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۳٥ ،۳۳ .................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ‪۲۰۹ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٤٤ ،۲۷ .........................‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪٤۳ ،۲۹ ،۱۳ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺫﻛﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪۲۹ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ‪٤۳ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ‪۳۰ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪۲۱٦ ........................‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪۱۸٥ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ )ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ‪٦۷ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ‪٤۲ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ‪۲۳٥ ................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﻋﺷﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ‪۹۰ ،۸۷ .............................‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪۹٤ ......................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪۱۰‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪٦٦ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪۲۲۰ ،۱۱٤ ............... (FE‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪۲۲۰ ،۱۰٦ ............ (AE‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ‪٥۲ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪٤۲ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪۲۲۰ ....‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۹۰ ،۸۷ ................................... (AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ( ‪۹۰ ،۸۷ ............‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ )ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ‪۸۹ ،۸۷ .........‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪۲۹ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ‪۲۱۷ ،۲۱٥ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻔﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪۱۱۲ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ )ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪۱۹۷ ،۱۸۲ ،۱٦۸ ...................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ‪۱۸۲ ...................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪۷٦ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺗﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ‪۱۳۱ ..............‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪۱۳٦ .........................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪۱۳۹ .......................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪۱۳٦ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱۳٤ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ‪۱۳۸ .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪۱٤٥ ..........................‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪۱۳۷ ...................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‪۱۳۳ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪۱۳٥ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ )ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪۱٤۳ ......‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ‪۱۳۷ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ‪۲۲۹ ،۹۳ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪۱۱۰ ،۱۰۸ ....‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪۱۰٤ ............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۱۱۳ .....................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﺵ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪۲۰۸ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ‪۲۰۸ .........................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪۲۰۸ .......‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪۲۰۸ .................‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ‪٥۳ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ ‪٥۰ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‪۱٦۳ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪۱۸۳ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪۷۲ ....................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۲۱۲ ،۸۹ ،۸۷ ........................... (AF‬‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪۲۳٦ ............................‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪٥۸ .................................‬‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۲٥۰ ،۲۸ ................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ‪۱٦۳ ،۱٥۷ ،٥۹ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ‪٥۹ ..................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪٦۰ ،٥۹ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ ‪٦٥ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ(‪۱۷۸ .................‬‬
‫ﺥ‬
‫ﺧﺭﺝ ‪) A/V‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ( ‪۱۷٦ ،۱٦۹ .............‬‬
‫ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ‪۱۷٦ ،۱٦۹ ......................‬‬
‫‪۲۷۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪٦٦ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪۷۲ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ‪۸۰ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ‪۸۰ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪٤ ......................................... 3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪٤ ..............................................M‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ‪۲٤۹ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) AF-ON‬ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ‪۳٥ ........‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۲۱۹ .......... (AF‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪۲۰٦ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪٤۲ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪۲۲۹ ،۲۰٦ ،۱٥۳ ،٦۲...................ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪٦۳ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪۲۰٦ .............................ISO‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪۲۰٦ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ‪۱۷۷ ،۱۷٦ ،۱٦۹ ،۳ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪۲٤ ،۲۲ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪۱۳ ..........................................LCD‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ‪۱۸۱ ..........................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٦۱ .................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۲۳۸ ،٤۰ ..........................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۲۲۹ .....................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ‪۳۸ .................................‬‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻓﺭﺓ‪۲۳۸ ،۸٥ ،٥۰ .................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪٦۷ ،٦٥ ............................‬‬
‫‪۲۷۲‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ‪٦۷ ،٦٥ ......................‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ‪٦٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۱٦۳ ... (AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪۱۷٤ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪۱۸۲ .................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ‪۱۷۹ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ‪۱٦۳ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ‪۱٦٤ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪۱٦٥ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ )ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪۱٦٦ ....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺑﺭ‪۱٦۷ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪۱٦۸ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪۱٦۱ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪۱۷۸ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪۱٦۳ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪۱۷٦ ،۱٦۹ ...................‬‬
‫ﺽ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪۸٦ ،٥۲ ....AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪۸٥ .....................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ‪۹۱ ....................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪۲۱۳ ،۱٤٥ ،۹۲ ....................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۲۱۲ ،۸۹ ،۸۷ .......................(AF‬‬
‫ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۲۱۹ ،۲۱۱ ،۲۱۰ ،۲۰۹ ............(AF‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۲۲۹ ،۲۲۰ ،۸٤ .....................(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۲۱۳ ...................................(AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۲۱۹ ،۲۱٤ ...........................(AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۲۲۹ ،۲۲۰ ،۸۸ .....................(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪۲۱٤ ..........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻓﺭﺓ ‪۲۳۸ ،٥۰ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺻﻌﺏ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ‪۱٤۲ ،۹۲ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ‪۱۳۱ ...............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ‪۲۱۳ ،۱٤٥ ،۹۲ ................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪۱٤۹ .................................‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ‪۱٤٥ ،۱٤۲ ،۹۲ ،٥۱ ........‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ‪٥۲ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ‪۲۱۹ ................‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء‪/‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ‪۷۸ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ )ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪٤۳ .......................(CF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ‪۱۰۳ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻲ ‪۱۰۳ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )‪۲۱۱ ................ (AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪۱٥۳ ،۱۰۲ ....................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻧﻛﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‪۳٤ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪۳٥ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ‪۳٥ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺿﻭء ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪٥۰ .............................‬‬
‫ﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‪۲۳٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪٤٤ ،۲۷ .....................‬‬
‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۲۸ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۲۳۰ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ‪۲۳٤ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‪۱۳۳ ،٥۹ ،۲۸ ....................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪۲٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪۱۸۹ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪۱۹۳ ................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ‪۱۹۲ ................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪۱۹۹ ....................(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪۱۹٤ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻝ ‪۱۹۷ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ‪۱۹۷ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪۹٦ ................ (AE‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪۹۷ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪۱۹۰ ............................‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ ‪۱۳۰ ،۱٦‬‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪٥۸ ......................‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‪٥۹ .......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪۳۱ ،۲۱ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ‪۳۲ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ‪۷٦ .......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪۱۷٤ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ‪۱٦٦ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪۱٥٦ ،۱۳٦ ،٤۷ ........................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۹‬ﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٦٥ ..........‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪۱٦٥ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺑﺭ ‪۱٦۷ ،۱٤٥ .............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻁﻝ ‪۲٤۳ ................................................‬‬
‫ﻍ‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﺔ ‪۱۰۸ ،۲۳ .........................‬‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺋﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ ‪۱۷۷ ،۱٦۹ ،۱٥٦ ......................‬‬
‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۲۸ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ‪۱٦۳ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۱۸ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‪۱۱۲ ...................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ‪۱۲۹ ،۱۱٥ ....‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪۲۲۰ ،۱۱٤ ...........(FE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪۱۱٥ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪۱۱۳ .................‬‬
‫‪۲۷۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪٥٤ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۲۰۷ ،۱۱۱ .................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪۱۱٦ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ‪۱۱٦ .................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻔﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪۱۱۲ .........................‬‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ )ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‪۱۱۷ ........‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ ‪۱۱۹ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۲۳۸ ................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ ‪۲۲۲ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪٤۰ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ‪۲۲۲ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۱۳۰ ........................‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪۳۷ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪۳٦ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ‪۳٦ .................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ‪۳۷ ............................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ‪۲۱٥ ،۱۰۹ ...................................‬‬
‫ﻙ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ‪۱۷۷ ،۱۷٦ ،۱٦۹ ،۳ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۰۹ ................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪٤٥ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۳٤ ................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪۲۲۸ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ‪۱۳۳ ،٥۹ ،۲۸ ........................‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪۱۸ .......................................... LCD‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ‪۸۰ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ‪۱۰۳ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ‪٥۹ ....................‬‬
‫‪۲۷٤‬‬
‫ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ( ‪۳۳ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ ‪۱٦ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‪۲۳٤ .....................‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪۱۳٦ .............................‬‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﱢ ﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪۷٥ ،٤۹ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪۱٦٤ ............... (RGB/‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪٥٦ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ‪۱۱۷ .............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪۱۱۷ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪۸۲ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ‪۲۲۱ ،۱٥۲ ،۱۳٤ ،٤۸..........‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۸۷ ...............(AF‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ‪۲۰٤ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ )ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ‪۱۷۹ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪٤٥ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ‪۱۰۷ ............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ‪۳۰ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪۱۱٦ ............. (FE‬‬
‫ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪۱۰٥ ،۷٤ ........................‬‬
‫ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )‪۲۰۷ ،۲۰٦ ،۱۰٥ ..................... (AEB‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ‪۱۳٥ ،۱۰۱ ........................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ ‪٦٥ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪۱٥٦ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‪۲۲٥ .....................‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ‪۱۰۸ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ‪۸۸ ،۳٦ ................‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪۱٤٥ ،۹۲ ،۳۱ ..............‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪۲۳٤ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪۱٦ .......................‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪۳۲ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻅﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‪۱۰۸................. ........................‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ‪٦٤ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻊ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۸۳ ...................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪٦۹ ،٦٤ ...................................‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ‪٥۸ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ‪۱۳۰ .............Canon‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪۸۲ .........................................ICC‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۲۲۹ ،۹۳ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ )ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪۱٤۳ ..........‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۲۱۲ ،۸۹ ،۸۷ .................. (AF‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪۲۲۹ ،۱۰۳ ................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۱۱٦ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ‪۱۷۷ ،۱٦۹ ،۱٥٦........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪۲۰٤ ...............................‬‬
‫‪۲۷٥‬‬
CANON INC. 30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
U.S.A.
CANON U.S.A. INC.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042-1198, U.S.A.
For all inquires concerning this product, call toll free in the U.S.
1-800-OK-CANON
CANADA
CANON CANADA INC. HEADQUARTERS
6390 Dixie Road, Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada
CANON CANADA INC. MONTREAL BRANCH
5990, Côte-de-Liesse, Montréal Québec H4T 1V7, Canada
CANON CANADA INC. CALGARY OFFICE
2828, 16th Street, N.E. Calgary, Alberta T2E 7K7, Canada
For all inquiries concerning this product, call toll free in Canada
1-800-OK-CANON
EUROPE,
AFRICA &
MIDDLE EAST
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON FRANCE S.A.S.
17,Quai du Président Paul Doumer, 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France
CANON UK LTD.
Woodhatch Reigate,Surrey RH2 8BF, United Kingdom
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.
Via Milano 8, 20097 San Donato Milanese, (MI), Italy
CANON Schweiz A.G.
Industriestrasse 12, 8305 Dietlikon, Switzerland
Canon GmbH
Zetschegasse 11, A-1230 Vienna, Austria
CANON España,S.A.
Av. De Europa,6 Alcobendas 28108 Madrid, Spain
CANON Portugal S.A.
Rua Alfredo da Silva,14 Alfragide 2610-016 Amadora, Portugal
CENTRAL &
SOUTH AMERICA
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.
703 Waterford Way, Suite 400 Miami, FL 33126,U.S.A.
ASIA
CANON (China) Co., LTD.
15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD.
19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
CANON KOREA CONSUMER IMAGING INC.
Gangnam Finance Center 17F, 737,Yeoksam-Dong, Gangnam-Gu, Seoul, 135-984, Korea
OCEANIA
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney N.S.W. 2113, Australia
CANON NEW ZEALAND LTD.
Akoranga Business Park, Akoranga Drive, Northcote, Auckland, New Zealand
JAPAN
CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC.
16-6, Kohnan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-8011, Japan
This Instruction Manual booklet is current as of September 2009. For information
on the camera’s compatibility with any accessories and lenses introduced after
this date, contact any Canon Service Center.
CT1-1032-000
© CANON INC. 2009
PRINTED IN JAPAN
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising